Skip to main content

Full text of "Manipulation of the microscope"

See other formats


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

Class 


MANIPULATION 


OF  THE 


MICROSCOPE 


BY 


EDWARD  BAUSCH 


ILLUSTRATED 


FOURTH  EDITION 
TWENTIETH    THOUSAND 


PUBLISHED    BY 

PUBLICATION    DEPARTMENT 

BAUSCH    ,t    LOME   OPTICAL  CO 

ROCHESTER    N.    Y. 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 


Copyright 

BAUSCH  &  LOME  OPTICAL  CO. 
1901 


PRESS  OF  THE 

BAUSCH  *   LOMB  OPTICAL  CO 
ROCHESTER,  N.  Y. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 

It  may  seem  to  some  persons  an  act  of  presumption 
for  a  mailer  of  microscopes  and  microscopical  acces- 
sories to  enter  the  field  of  authorship  and  attempt  to 
supplement  the  valuable  labors  which  in  recent  years 
have  made  the  use  of  the  microscope  an  indispensible 
aid  in  the  advancement  of  science. 

To  such,  if  any,  I  submit  that,  being  a  producer 
of  microscopes  and  their  accessories,  I  have  had 
opportunity  to  become  acquainted  with  the  lack  of 
general  knowledge  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
the  instrument  and  the  best  methods  of  technique,  even 
among  owners  of  microscopes.  Indeed,  with  so  many 
complications,  with  almost  unlimited  powers  and  uses 
of  the  instrument,  the  beginner  cannot  fail  to  feel  the 
need  of  a  guide  and  adviser. 

In  order  to  accomplish  the  greatest  good,  I  have 
started  out  in  this  little  Manual  with  the  supposition 
that  the  purchaser,  or  owner,  is  a  beginner,  and 
absolutely  ignorant  of  the  microscope  and  everything 
which  pertains  to  it,  and  therefore  have  attempted  to 
convey,  step  by  step,  in  as  simple  language  as  I  could 
command,  information  which  will,  I  trust,  lead  to  ease 
of  manipulation  and  give  both  pleasure  and  profit  to 
those  for  whom  it  was  specially  written. 

With  these,  its  purposes  and  hopes,  I  beg  for  my 
self-imposed  labor  a  friendly  reception. 

EDWARD  BAUSCH. 

June  i,  1885. 


206598 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 

The  demand  for  this  book  having  considerably 
exceeded  the  expectations  of  its  author,  and  the  com- 
ments on  its  utility  having  been  so  favorable,  lead  to 
the  view  that  it  fills  a  gap  in  microscopical  literature. 

In  preparing  for  a  new  edition  an  opportunity  has 
been  given  for  enlarging  on  some  of  the  subjects  and 
rewriting  others,  so  as  to  make  them  conform  to  the 
changes  which  the  last  five  years  have  brought  about 
in  the  construction  of  apparatus. 

While  it  may  be  true  that  many  of  the  subjects 
might  be  treated  much  more  extensively,  the  writer  has 
purposely  refrained  from  doing  so,  because  he  has  con- 
sidered it  beyond  the  province  of  his  intention,  and 
because  books  giving  more  extensive  information  are 
available. 

An  intending  purchaser  of  a  microscope  finds  it 
more  or  less  difficult  to  make  a  suitable  selection  and, 
while  it  is  always  best  to  consult  an  experienced 
microscopist,  the  writer  has  endeavored  to  convey 
information  which,  he  hopes,  will  aid  in  this  direction. 

THE  AUTHOR. 
May,  1891. 


in 


PREFACE  TO  THIRD  EDITION. 

The  past  demand  for  this  little  volume  makes 
extended  remarks  superfluous,  the  new  edition  appear- 
ing as  evidence  that  it  is  considered  of  some  value. 

This  edition  has  been  almost  entirely  rewritten  to 
bring  it  in  accord  with  the  advance  which  has  been 
made  in  the  construction  of  microscopes  -and  acces- 
sories and  while  it  is  not  expected  to  be  a  complete 
guide,  it  is,  nevertheless,  hoped  that  it  will  lighten 
the  labor  of  the  beginner. 

Since  its  first  issue  there  have  appeared  two  books 
covering  the  same  purpose:  "  The  Microscope  and 
Microscopical  Methods "  by  Prof.  S.  H.  Gage  of 
Cornell  University  and  "  Microscopical  Praxis "  or 
"  Simple  Methods  of  Ascertaining  the  Properties  of 
Various  Microscopical  Accessories"  by  Dr.  A.  C.  Stokes, 
both  of  which  are  heartily  commended  to  the  micro- 
scopist.  Neither  should  be  wanting  in  a  microscopical 
library.  The  writer  is  also  pleased  to  acknowledge  the 
suggestions  of  an  enlarged  scope  for  this  book,  which 
he  has  obtained  by  a  perusal  of  them,  as  well  as  from 
the  admirable  work  of  Dr.  W.  H.  Dallinger  in  the 
latest  issue  of  Carpenter,  "  The  Microscope  and  its 
Revelations  ",  which  may  be  commended  to  those  who 
wish  to  study  more  deeply  the  principles  of  the  micro- 
scope and  learn  its  history  and  development. 


The  writer  trusts  that  omissions  will  be  pardoned, 
as  the  only  time  which  it  has  "been  possible  to  devote 
to  this  work  has  been  the  spare  moments  of  a  busy  life, 
and  hopes  sufficient  information  may  be  obtained  to 
give  full  compensation  for  such  defects. 

THE  AUTHOR. 
March  i,  1897. 


VI 


PREFACE  TO  FOURTH  EDITION. 

In  the  revision  for  this  edition  an  effort  has  been 
made  to  reach  greater  conciseness  in  the  explanations 
and  in  paragraphing  the  instructions  in  the  use  of 
various  kinds  of  apparatus.  Many  of  the  illustrations 
have  been  replaced  by  new  ones,  and  others  have  been 
added. 

This  book  has  been  adopted  in  many  schools  as  a 
text  book  and  it  is  hoped  that  its  usefulness  in  this 
direction  may  be  extended. 

THE  AUTHOR. 
October,  1901. 


VII 


OPTICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  LENSES. 

Purpose  of  the  Microscope.  The  microscope 
is  an  instrument  which  magnifies  small  objects,  so  that 
we  are  better  able  to  examine  their  structure  than  is 
possible  with  unassisted  vision. 

Simple  and  Compound  Microscopes.  Micro- 
scopes are  divided  into  two  classes — simple  and 
compound, — the  difference  between  the  two  being  as 
follows: 

The  simple  microscope  is  usually  of  low  magnify- 
ing power  and  consists  of  one  lens  or  a  single  system 
of  lenses  through  which  the  object  is  viewed  directly 
and  the  image  is  seen  erect,  or  in  its  real  position. 

The  compound  microscope  gives  a  higher  magnify- 
ing power  and  the  image  formed  by  one  system  of 
lenses  is  observed  through  a  second  system  of  lenses, 
and  the  final  magnified  image  appears  reversed,  so 
that  what  is  right  in  the  object  is  left  in  the  image. 

Lenses.  As  microscopes  depend  upon  the  action 
of  lenses  it  seems  fitting  that  they,  as  well  as  their 
action  on  light  passing  through  them,  should  receive 
attention. 


Every  person  has  unquestionably  observed  that 
•  when  a  spoon  is  placed  in  a  tumbler  of  water  it  is 
apparently  bent  at  the  surface  of  the  water,  or  when 
looking  at  an  object  lying  in  the  bottom  of  a  dish,  it  is 
apparently  at  a  different  point  than  when  viewed  from 
the  side.  This  is  caused  by  the  deflection  or  bending 
of  the  rays  of  light  as  they  pass  from  one  transparent 
medium  into  another  of  greater  or  less  density  and  is 
called  refraction.  The  amount  of  refraction  increases  as 
the  difference  in  the  density  of  the  two  media  becomes 
greater.  We  also  know  that  in  viewing  objects  through 
a  glass  prism,  they  apparently  lie  in  a  direction  differ- 
ent from  their  real  one.  The  amount  of  this  deviation 
depends  for  the  one  factor  upon  the  density  of  the 

glass  composing  the 
prism  and  for  the 
other  upon  its  shape. 


Fig.  i  represents 
a  cross  section  of 
a  prism  and  shows 

how     the      ray     on 

-  ,       r 

entering  at  the  first 

surface  undergoes  refraction  and  how  on  emerging  at 
the  second  surface  a  second  refraction  takes  place. 
It  will  be  noticed  that  the  light  is  bent  downward 
or  toward  the  base  of  the  prism  and  if  the  prism 
be  imagined  reversed  with  its  base  upward,  the  action 


of  the  prism  on  the  light  will  be  the  same,  but  the 
light  will  be  bent  upward,  always  toward  the  base. 

Now,  a  lens  in  either  of  its  two  principal  forms  is  in 
effect  a  combination  of  two  prisms.     In  Fig.  2,  where 

the  two  bases  are 
placed  together,  is 
shown  how  the  light 
is  refracted  toward 
the  bases  and  thereby 
converged.  In  Fig.  3, 
where  the  bases  are 
in  reverse  position,  the 

fig.  2. 

action    of   the  prisms 

on  the  light  is  the  same,  the  rays  being  refracted 
toward  the  bases  thus  causing  them  to  diverge  or 
separate. 

In  Fig.  4  is 
shown  how,  by  in- 
creasing the  number 
of  prism  faces,  the 
form  of  a  lens  is 
gradually  approach- 
ed. 

If    the     combina- 
tions  of   prisms    be 
imagined   with    curved    surfaces    instead  of  flat  ones, 
their  action  on  light   passing   through    them  will    be 


Fig.  3. 


precisely  the  same  and  we  have  the  two  great  classes 
of  lenses,  converging  or  convex  and  diverging  or 
concave,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


These  two   classes  are    again    subdivided,    Fig.   6 
showing  the  three  forms  of  the  convex  and  concave 


IV 


Fig.  6. 

types  which  are,  beginning  at  the  left: 
/ — double    convex,    II — plane    convex,    III — convex 
meniscus,     IV — double    concave,     V — plane    concave, 
VI — concave  meniscus. 


Fig.  7. 


In  the  convex  lenses,  parallel  or  nearly  parallel 
rays  are  converged  to  one  point  as  shown  in  Fig.  7. 
This  point  c  is  the 
principal  focus,  or 
focal  point,  and  the 
distance  from  the 
point  b,  called  the 
principal  point,  to 
ris  the  focal  length. 
With  the  same  lens, 
if  a  flame  be  placed 
at  c,  all  the  rays 
which  strike  the  lens  will  emerge  in  a  parallel  direction 
on  the  opposite  side.  The  straight  line  d  b  c  which 
passes  through  the  middle  of  the  lens  is  called  the 
principal  axis  and  the  distance  a  c,  which  for  the  sake 
of  simplicity  has  been  taken  from  the  focal  point  as 
center,  the  radius. 

The  radius  of  curvature  in  combination  with  the 
refracting  power  of  the  glass  determines  the  converg- 
ing quality  of  a  lens  and  consequently  its  focal  length, 
and  as  the  radius  is  lengthened  the  focus  becomes 
longer.  In  the  ordinary  lenses  the  glass  used  is,  with 
very  slight  variation,  of  the  same  refracting  power,  so 
that  the  difference  in  focus  is  dependent  upon  the  curva- 
ture of  the  surfaces.  If  in  a  double  convex  lens  the 
radius  of  each  surface  is  one  inch,  the  lens  has  a  focus 
of  one  inch,  and  if  in  a  plane  convex  lens  the  convex 


surface  has  this  same  radius,  the  refracting  power  is 
one-half  and  the  focus  is  twice  as  long,  or  two  inches. 

In  a  concave  lens,  the  action  of  the  lens  is  opposite; 
instead  of  converging  the  light  toward  the  axis,  it 
diverges  the  rays  from  the  axis  as  shown  in  Fig.  8. 


Fig.  8. 

The  imaginary  extension  of  the  diverging  rays 
should  meet  at  e  and  the  distance  t  b  indicates  the 
virtual  focus,  in  contradistinction  to  the  real  focus  in 
the  convex  lens. 

To  Determine  the  Focal  Length  of  a 
Convex  Lens.  The  focal  length  of  the  lens  may 
be  quite  accurately  determined  by  the  following 
methods : 


/ — Hold  the  lens  toward  the  sun  with  one  hand. 
With  the  other  hold  a  piece  of  paper  under  it. 
Move  the  paper  slowly  toward  the  lens.  A  large  bright 
spot  will  appear,  which,  as  the  paper  is  brought  nearer, 
will  decrease  in  size  but  increase  in  intensity  until 
it  becomes  quite  small,  and  as  the  paper  is  brought 
still  closer  to  the  lens  the  image  will  be  found  to 
enlarge  again.  Return  again  until  the  spot  decreases 
to  smallest  she.  The  distance  between  lens  and  paper 
is  the  focal  length.  By  holding  sufficiently  long, 
the  paper,  especially  if  it  be  dark,  will  be  found  to 
burn,  due  to  the  concentration  of  heat  rays  and  hence 
this  point  is  called  the  burning  point  or  focal  point. 

II — In  a  room  opposite  a  window  or  at  a  con- 
siderable distance  from  a  lamp,  hold  the  end  of  a 
ruler  against  a  white  wall  and  place  the  edge  of 
the  lens  against  it,  so  that  the  axis  of  the  lens  will 
be  parallel  with  the  ruler.  Move  the  lens  sfowly 
toward  or  away  from  the  wall  until  a  greatly 
reduced  but  bright  image  of  either  object  appears 
sharply  defined.  Read  off  the  distance  between  the 
wall  and  edge  of  lens.  This  is  the  focal  length. 

In  a  lens  of  considerable  thickness  measure  from 
the  centre  of  the  lens. 

Magnifying  Power.  Magnifying  power  of  a 
convex  lens  depends  upon  its  converging  power. 

In  Fig.  9,  a  b  represents  the  object,  c  d  the  lens, 
<?  the  pupil  of  the  eye.  iy  following  the  coirse  of 


rays  from  the  object  it  will  be  noted  how  they  are 
refracted  by  the  lens  and  intercepted  by  the  pupil  of 
the  eye.  If  now  the  lines  between  c  and  d  be  pro- 
longed, they  will  be  found  to  meet  beyond  a  b  and 
there  form  a  virtual  image.  It  will  be  well  to  under- 
stand at  this  point  the  difference  between  a  real  and 
a  virtual  image.  The  real  image  is  one  which  can 


Fig.  9. 


be  accurately  seen  and  projected  upon  a  surface,  as 
with  the  magic  lantern,  or  in  the  photographic  camera. 
The  virtual  image  cannot  be  so  projected,  although 
readily  seen  by  looking  through  the  lens. 

In  a  lens  of  less  convexity  or  longer  focus,  there  is 
less  convergence  of  rays  ;  the  size  of  the  virtual  image 
is  consequently  reduced  and  thus  the  magnification  is 
less. 


8 


Spherical  Aberration.  In  considering  the  refrac- 
tion of  light  by  a  lens,  we  have  up  to  this  point 
purposely  avoided  mentioning  another  quality  which  is 
incident  to  it.  In  magnifying  an  object  with  a  single 
lens  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  virtual  image  as  seen 
through  its  central  portion  is  quite  clear,  while  that 
near  the  margin  or  edge  is  quite  indistinct.  This  is 
due  to  spherical  aberration  and  the  extent  of  this 
aberration  increases  with  the  power  of  the  lens. 

It  is  due  to  the  difference  in  refraction  of  those 
rays  passing  near  the  margin  and  those  passing  through 
the  central  portion,  so  that  the  rays,  instead  of  combin- 
ing at  the  focal  point,  come  together  at  different  inter- 
vals along  the  central  line  or  principal  axis. 

By  reference  to  Fig.  10  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
outer  or  marginal  rays  are  refracted  at  e  and  f  so 


that  they  will  combine  at  o,  and  the  inner  or  central 
rays  are  refracted  at  g  and  k  so  that  they  will  meet 


at  /.  In  the  same  manner  will  the  rays  which  enter 
between  c  h  and  /  d  come  together  at  intermediate 
points  between  o  and  /,  and  those  of  the  central  portion 
between  h  and  /  will  fall  beyond  /.  Spherical  aberra- 
tion increases  with  the  decrease  in  the  focus  of  a  lens 
and  in  lenses  of  the  same  focus  but  different  form,  is 
greatest  in  the  double  convex  and  least  in  the  so-called 
crossed  lens,  in  which  the  two  convex  surfaces  are  of 
different  radii  and  in  the  proportion  of  i  to  6,  on 
condition,  however,  that  the  surface  of  shorter  radius  is 
directed  toward  the  object. 

This  latter  form  of  magnifying  lens  is  seldom  used, 
as  it  shows  the  greatest  amount  of  aberration  if  used  in 
the  reversed  position.  The  most  common  form  is  the 
double  convex  with  equal  curvatures  and  when  con- 
siderable magnifying  power  is  desired,  the  defects  of 
spherical  aberration  are  partially  overcome  by  the 
interposition  of  an  opaque  plate,  with  round  opening, 
to  shut  out  the  marginal  rays.  This  plate  is  called 
a  diaphragm  and  when  used  the  lens  is  said  to  be 
stopped  down. 

Chromatic  Aberration.  In  magnifying  an  object 
with  a  single  lens  it  will  be  noticed  that  it  has  not  only 
the  defect  of  spherical  aberration,  but  that  the  object 
appears  fringed  with  colors,  predominantly  violet  and 
red,  or  if  objects  are  viewed  through  a  prism,  we  have 
not  only  an  apparent  change  of  position,  but  a  decided 


appearance  of  so-called  rainbow  colors.  This  appear- 
ance is  called  chromatic  aberration  and  is  a  result  of 
refraction.  It  is  caused  by  dispersion  or  the  dispersive 
quality,  the  separation  of  light  into  its  primary  colors, 
violet,  indigo,  blue,  green,  yellow,  orange  and  red,  in  the 
Order  given. 


indiifo 
•iolet 


Fig.  11. 


The  dispersion  of  light  by  a  prism  is  shown  in 
Fig.  1 1 ,  and  it  will  be  seen  that  the  ray  of  white  light 
a  b  on  entering  the  prism  at  b  is  separated  into  the 
different  colors  in  the  order  given,  and  that  on 
emergence  at  the  second  surface  the  violet  ray  at  v  has 
undergone  the  greatest  amount  of  refraction  and  the 
red  ray  at  r  the  least.  The  band  of  colors  formed 
is  called  the  spectrum.  The  results  of  dispersion  are 
nicely  illustrated  in  the  diamond,  this  having  a  very 
high  degree  of  refracting  power  and  is  polished  or  cut 
to  make  a  many-sided  prism  in  which  each  face  or 

ii 


facet  creates  refraction  with  its  consequent  dispersion 
and  play  of  colors. 

With  the  light  as  refracted  by  a  lens  or  prism,  on 
its  emergence  the  violet  ray,  being  the  more  refrang- 
ible, will  be  principally  affected  and  be  brought  to  a 
focus  within  the  principal  focus,  and  the  red  ray  will 
be  brought  to  a  focus  beyond  that  of  the  violet. 

To  avoid  spherical  and  chromatic  aberrations  to 
the  greatest  possible  extent  has  been  for  many  years 
the  study  of  opticians. 


Fig.  12. 

How  this  was  successfully  accomplished  is  explained 
by  reference  to  Fig.  1 2  where  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
ray  of  white  light  is  separated  into  the  various  colored 
rays,  from  red  to  violet,  in  passing  through  the  first 
prism  which  is  made  of  crown  glass,  and  that  the  rays 
would  continue  to  diverge  in  the  direction  r  r'  for  the 
red,  and  v  v'  for  the  violet.  If  now  a  second  prism  of 


12 


suitable  flint  glass  with  about  one-half  the  refracting 
angle  and  in  reversed  position  is  placed  close  to  the 
first  or  crown  glass  prism  the  red  ray  will  be  refracted 
in  the  direction  rr  r" ,  and  the  violet  in  the  direction 
7/  z/',  so  that  on  emerging  at  r"  and  v"  respectively, 
the  red  and  blue  rays  will  continue  in  a  parallel  course 
and  thus  be  recomposed  into  a  beam  of  white  light, 
which  is  changed  in  its  direction  from  a  b  d  to  r"  e. 

Thus  it  is  possible  not  only  to  avoid  dispersion  but 
to  obtain  a  converging  effect.     If  now  the  prisms  will 
be  imagined  as  a  combination  of  lenses 
we   have  a  so-called  corrected  or  achro- 
matic combination  or  lens. 

If  the  chromatic  and  spherical  aberra- 
tions are  both  corrected  it  is  called 
aplanatic.  The  convex  lens  is  made  of 
crown  glass  and  the  concave  <&  flint  glass. 

The  corrected  lens  shown  in  Fig.  13 
is  an  achromatic  lens  of  the  simplest 
form  and  while  not  absolutely  corrected  is  generally 
used  when  the  demands  on  it  are  not  too  great. 
Better  correction  is  obtained  when  two  or  more  of 
these  lenses  are  used  in  combination  and  they  are 
thus  used  in  some  of  the  lenses  of  the  compound 
microscope.  The  variety  of  forms,  due  to  the  variety 
of  glass  from  which  combinations  may  be  made,  is 
almost  infinite. 


Fig.  13. 


SIMPLE  MICROSCOPES. 

Simple  microscopes  are  usually  termed  magnifiers 
and  whether  consisting  of  one  or  several  lenses  in 
close  contact,  always  remain  simple.  They  are  made 
to  be  held  in  the  hand  or  are  fixed  on  a  stand  or 

mounting,  which  is  pro- 
vided with  adjustments 
for  focusing,  thus  giving 
steadiness  and  leaving  the 
hands  free  for  dissecting 
Fl8'  14'  or  moving  the  object 

during  observation.  Magnifiers  are  made  in  a  large 
variety  of  forms,  the  difference  appearing  in  their 
optical  as  well  as  mechanical  construction.  The  most 
common  are  those  with  one  or  several  double  convex 
lenses  mounted  in  hard 
rubber  or  vulcanite, 
nickel,  aluminum,  cel- 
luloid, etc.,  and  ar- 
ranged to  be  folded  for 

Fig.    15. 

pocket  use  as  shown  in 

Fig.  14  and  Fig.  15.     Those  containing  several  lenses 

are  preferable,   since  they  offer  a  variety  of  magnify- 


ing    powers    and   in    combination    give    the   greatest 
magnification  admissible  with  single  lenses. 

Doublet  Magnifier.  This  lens,  Fig.  16,  recently 
introduced,  is  composed  of  two 'separated  plane  convex 

lenses  and,  while  not  so 
compact  for  pocket  use, 
eliminates  some  of  the 
optical  defects  of  the 
ordinary  magnifiers. 

Fig.   16. 

Coddington  Lens.  A  lens  of  greater  efficiency 
than  either  the  ordinary  magnifier  or  the  doublet 
magnifier  is  the  Coddington  lens,  Fig.  17'. 

While  this  is  also  a  single  double  convex  lens 
it,  will  be  noticed  that  it  has  considerable  thickness, 
being  really  the  central  portion  of  a  sphere  and 
provided  with  a  circular  incision  at  the  middle,  which 
is  blackened  and  thus 
acts  as  a  diaphragm, 
shutting  out  the  marginal 
rays  and  correcting  the 
spherical  aberration,  at 
the  same  time,  however, 
limiting  the  size  of  field. 

In  selecting  a  Coddington,  one  should  avoid  those 
which  are  of  ten 'offered  as  the  real  and  which  consist 


of  two  double  convex  lenses,  separated  by  a  black 
diaphragm,  giving  the  external  appearance  of  a  Cod- 
dington  while  in  reality  being  only  an  inferior  Doublet. 

Aplanatic  Triplet.  The  best  type  of  magnifier 
is  the  Aplanatic  Triplet,  Fig.  18.  It  is  composed  of 
three  lenses  cemented  together  in  such  a  manner  that 
they  are  virtually  one.  For  many  years  this  form  was, 


Fit.  18.  Fig.  19. 

on  account  of  cost,  used  only  to  a  limited  extent,  but 
an  increased  demand  has  brought  about  a  greatly 
reduced  price.  Its  advantage  lies  in  the  fact  that  both 
the  spherical  and  chromatic  aberrations  are  corrected 
to  a  high  degree,  thus  enabling  the  observation  of 
minute  detail  and  giving  a  large  field  which  is  flat  to 
the  extreme  margin.  It  can  be  highly  recommended 
to  those  wishing  a  good  magnifier. 

Hastings'  Aplanatic  Triplet.  This  form  of 
lens,  Fig.  19,  has  been  computed  by  Prof.  C.  S.  Hastings 
of  Yale  University  and  is  a  modification  of  the  Aplanatic 
Triplet,  giving  not  only  the  highest  spherical  and  chro- 

16 


matic  corrections,  but  a  considerably  flatter  and  larger 
angular  field  and  longer  working  distance ;  that  is,  the 
distance  between  lens  and  object  is  greater  and  is  an 
important  feature  in  higher  powers,  as  it  admits  of 
better  illumination  of  the  object  and  greater  ease  in 
working. 

In  all  the  better  types  of  magnifiers  the  vulcanite 
mountings  are  discarded  for  those  made  of  metal, 
especially  German  silver,  although  many  are  used  of 
pure  silver  and  some  even  of  gold. 

Reading  Glass.  When  magnifying  lenses  reach 
a  diameter  of  2  inches  or  more  they  are  usually  termed 
Reading  Glasses  and  are  then  provided  with  a  "handle. 
They  are  used  to  examine  large  objects  or  areas,  where 
a  low  magnification  is  sufficient,  to  enlarge  small 
printed  matter,  or  to  determine  detail  in  engravings 
and  photographs. 

Bruecke  Lens.  This  lens,  named  after  its 
inventor,  is  designed  to  give  a  longer  working  distance 
between  lens  and  object  than  can  be  obtained  with 
simple  lenses  of  the  same  magnifying  power  and  to 
give  an  erect  image  at  the  same  time,  such  qualities 
being  manifestly  desirable  for  dissecting  and  similar 
work. 

A  combination  of  achromatic  Jenses  forms  the 
image  which  is  viewed  through  an  achromatic  con- 


cave  eye  lens  by  means  of  which  magnifications  from 
5  to  100  diameters  are  obtained.  Change  in  magnify- 
ing power  is  conveniently  made  either  by  changing 
the  object  lenses  or  by  varying  the  position  of  the  eye 
lens.  The  field  of  this  lens  is  necessarily  small  but  it 
is  the  only  form  yet  devised  by  which  a  long  working 
distance  combined  with  high  magnifying  power  can  be 
obtained. 

Holders,  Stands  and  Dissecting  Micro- 
scopes. There  is  a  great  variety  of  mechanical  contri- 
vances for  holding  magnifiers,  to  give  steadiness  as 
well  as  to  leave  the  hands  free  for  moving  and  working 

on  the  object  and  adjusting 
for  focus.  When  provision 
is  made  to  hold  and  adjust 
the  lens  the  apparatus  may 
be  called  a  lens  holder  or 
stand,  but  when  a  platform 
called  a  stage,  upon  which 
the  object  can  be  placed, 
Fig-  20.  and  a  mirror  for  illuminating 

the  object  properly,  are  added,  it  is  called  a  dissecting 
microscope. 

There  are  two  forms  of  magnifiers  which  contain 
within  themselves  some  properties  of  stands.  One,  the 
Tripod  Magnifier,  Fig.  20,  rests  upon  three  legs  and 
has  a  screw  for  adjustment  of  focus.  Its  optical  parts 

18 


are  two  convex  lenses,  usually  having  a  power  of 
ten  diameters,  which  are  separated  by  a  diaphragm, 
giving  a  large,  fairly  flat  field.  It  is  especially  used  in 
primary  botanical  and  zoological  work. 

Another  is  the  Linen  Tester,  Fig.  21.  It  is  made 
in  various  sizes,  but  the  ordinary  form  has  a  lens  of 
i  inch  focus.  It  is  arranged 
to  fold  into  small  compass  for 
convenience  in  carrying,  and 
when  opened  for  use  is  placed 
over  the  object  so  that  this 
comes  into  the  square  opening 
in  the  base  and  is  then  exactly 
in  the  focus  of  the  lens.  Its 
F.  21  principal  use,  as  its  name  in- 

dicates, is  in  the  textile  indus- 
tries for  counting  the  number  of  threads  which  appear 
in  the  standard  openings  of  \  or  \  inch. 

The  simplest  form  of  holder  is  a  base  to  which  is 
fixed  a  series  of  ball  and  socket  joints,  which  offer 
means  of  adjusting  the  magnifier  in  every  direction. 
A  spring  clip  is  provided  for  holding  magnifiers  of 
different  sizes.  The  lens  is  focused  by  raising  and 
lowering  the  lens  clip  by  hand.  In  some  of  the  more 
complex  holders  there  is  a  rack  and  pinion  for  focusing 
the  lans  which  adds  to  convenience  in  woiking. 

For  finer  dissecting  work  a  stand  with  fiim  base, 
stage,  lans  holder,  and  mirror,  and  with  adjustment  for 


the  magnifier  is  required.     Of  this  type  Fig.  22  repre- 
sents one  of  the  most  simple  and  inexpensive  forms; 


Fig.  22.     Barnes  Dissecting  Microscope. 

Fig.  23  a  compact  form  in  which  all  the  parts  may 
be  placed  in  the  box  which  forms  the  base  so  that  the 


Fig.  23. 


whole  may  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  while  Fig.  24 
shows  a  form  recommended  by  the  highest  authorities 
for  advanced  work. 


20 


How  to  use  Magnifiers  and  Dissecting 
Microscopes.  It  is  generally  admitted  that  the 
intelligent  use  of  a  magnifier  is  a  great  aid  in  micro- 
scopical Studies  and  while  its  use  is  a  simple  matter, 
some  words  of  advice  may  be  of  aid  in  obtaining  better 
results,  or  lead  to  doing  work  with  more  comfort.  In 
all  work,  whether  with  simple  or  compound  micro- 
scopes, it  is  a  good  plan  to  start  out  with  the  principle 
not  to  use  a  greater  magnifying  power  than  is  necessary 
to  accomplish  the' results  in  view. 

It  should  be  made  a 
habit  at  the  outset  to 
keep  both  eyes  open. 

Keep  the  eye  com- 
fortably near  to  the 
upper  surface  of  the 
lens,  as  the  angular 
view  or  field  is  in- 
creased, there  is  the 
least  spherical  aberra- 
tion, and  the  focal  dis- 
tance is  the  greatest. 
This  can  be  easily 
Fig  24.  tested  by  gradually  in- 

creasing the  distance 

between  the  eye  and  lens,  when  it  will  be  found  that 
the  lens  must  be  brought  nearer  to  the  object.  In 
single  lenses  the  spherical  and  chromatic  aberrations 


become  more  pronounced  and  the  field  smaller  as  the 
distance  between  eye  and  lens  is  increased. 

When  magnifiers  are  used  on  opaque  objects — 
those  which  are  not  transparent  and  which  are  illumin- 
ated by  reflected  light  not  transmitted  through  them 
— a  position  should  be  chosen  opposite  a  window 
or  flame  that  the  greatest  amount  of  light  will  reach 
the  object.  If  a  hat  is  worn  place  it  back  on  the  head 
so  that  the  rim  will  not  cut  off  the  light. 

Holding  the  object  in  one  hand,  take  the  magnifier 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  other  and  place 
the  fingers  of  the  hand  holding  the  lens  in  such  a  manner 
that  they  shall  rest  upon  the  other  hand,  thus  insuring 
steadiness  of  the  lens  and  object  and  adding  consider- 
ably to  the  comfort  of  working. 

While  it  seldom  occurs  that  magnifiers  are  made 
with  other  than  double  convex  surfaces,  single  achro- 
matic lenses  with  plane  convex  surfaces  are  sometimes 
used.  These  should  be  used  with  their  convex  sur- 
faces toward  each  other. 

In  magnifiers  containing  several  lenses,  when  they 
are  used  together,  the  one  of  highest  power  should  be 
nearest  the  object. 

When  reversed  the  angular  field  is  greater,  but  the 
spherical  and  chromatic  aberrations  are  correspondingly 
greater. 

22 


In  simple  dissecting  microscopes  like  the  Barnes,  in 
which  the  mirror  is  in  a  fixed  position,  the  microscope 
should  be  set  squarely  before 
the  source  of  light.  Diffused 
day  light  is  always  preferable 
to  any  artificial  illumination. 
Whatever  the  source  of 
light  may  be  it  is  seldom  too 
strong  when  viewing  opaque 
objects;  in  fact  the  want  of 
sufficient  light  is  too  often  ex- 
perienced, especially  indoors. 
With  transparent  objects, 
however,  whether  viewed  by 
looking  toward  the  light 
or  by  means  of  a  reflecting 
mirror  the  contrary  is  too 
often  the  case,  so  that  an 
object  is  viewed  in  a  glare 
of  light  and  is  liable  to  in- 
juriously affect  the  eye. 
When  the  light  is  too  strong  reduce  it  or  change  the 
position  of  the  body  or  the  instrument. 

While  in  some  classes  of  work  it  is  perhaps  unnec- 
essary to  have  the  very  best  magnifiers,  such  as  the 
Aplanatic  or  Hastings'  Aplanatic  Triplets,  the  latter 
can  always  be  recommended,  when  the  means  will 
permit,  on  account  of  the  higher  results  and  greater 


Correct  manner  of   holding 
magnifier  and  object. 


degree  of  satisfaction  and  comfort  derived  from  them. 

Caution.  Unless  a  microscope,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  is  known  to  come  from  the  hands  of  a 
reliable  maker,  any  claim  as  to  magnifying  power 
should  be  accepted  with  reserve.  In  former  years, 
when  the  country  was  overrun  with  cheap  foreign  pro- 
ductions, the  most  fanciful  claims  were  made  in  this 
direction.  Avoid  strolling  or  street  venders  who,  as  a 
rule,  not  only  make  the  most  ridiculous  claims  as  to 
magnifying  power,  but  charge  much  higher  prices  than 
the  same  articles  can  be  bought  for  from  reliable 
opticians  and  generally  offer  worthless  articles  or,  at 
best,  of  doubtful  value. 

Some  precaution  should  also  be  used  in  reference 
to  quality  in  purchasing  a  magnifier.  As  competition 
causes  a  downward  tendency  in  prices,  it  unfortunately 
often  involves  a  deterioration  in  quality.  The  ordinary 
forms  are  mounted  in  vulcanite;  black  horn  is  'often 
palmed  off  as  such,  but  is  a  poor  substitute  as  it  warps 
and  cracks.  The  surfaces  of  lenses,  instead  of  being 
perfectly  polished,  are  often  scratched  and  unfinished, 
showing  small  pitholes  or  undulating  surfaces.  This 
is  common  among  cheap  Coddington  lenses  and 
naturally  destroys  the  distinctness  of  the  image. 

Magnifying  Power.  It  is  evident  that  a  lens 
magnifies  an  object  equally  in  all  directions ;  this  is 
said  to  be  in  areas,  and  is  the  square  of  the  linear,  or 
diameter,  so  that  if  an  object  is  magnified  four  times 

24 


in  the  linear,  it  is  magnified  sixteen  times  in  area.  The 
commonly  accepted  term  to  express  magnifying  power 
of  simple  as  well  as  compound  microscopes  is  in 
diameters*  (linear). 

To  Determine  Magnifying  Power.  For  simple 
lenses  the  magnifying  power  may  be  determined  by 
dividing  ten  by  the  focal  length  in  inches.  Thus  a 
single  lens  of  i  inch  focus  magnifies  about  ten  dia- 
meters; one  of  2  inch  focus,  about  five  diameters; 
one  of  \  inch  focus,  twenty  diameters,  and  so  on.  In 
a  lens  of  high  magnifying  power,  the  focus  is  ordinarily 
made  about  twice  the  diameter,  so  that  if  a  lens  is 
\  inch  diameter  its  focus  is  about  i  inch. 

While  the  determination  of  focus  in  single  lenses 
gives  approximate  magnifying  power,  it  will  not  do  so 
in  some  of  the  forms  which  have  been  described.  The 
following  method,  if  carefully  followed,  will  give  very 
accurate  results  and  is  withal  simple  and  interesting: 
Place  a  sheet  of  white  paper  on  the  table.  With  the 
source  of  light  at  the  right  or  left  hand,  arrange  a  pile 
of  books  to  such  height  that  when  the  magnifier  to  be 
tested  is  placed  upon  the  pile  with  the  lens  projecting 
toward  the  observer  the  distance  between  the  upper 
surface  of  the  lens  and  the  paper  \\ill  be  exactly  ten 
inches.  The  magnifier  can  be  held  in  place  by 
another  book  placed  upon  it.  Place  a  pocket  ruler 
between  the  leaves  of  the  upper  book  so  that  when  the 
edge  is  close  to  the  magnifier  the  divisions  on  the  ruler 

25 


will  be  exactly  in  focus.  Place  the  ruler  so  that  it  will 
not  cover  much  of  the  lens.  It  is  immaterial  what  the 
divisions  on  the  ruler  are,  whether  inches  or  milli- 
meters, so  long  as  they  are  reasonably  fine.  View  the 
divisions  with  the  right  eye  and  open  the  left  eye,  when 
it  will  be  found  that  the  divisions  are  apparently  pro- 
jected upon  the  paper.  Take  a  pencil  and  outline  one 
of  the  spaces  upon  the  paper.  By  dividing  this 
enlarged  space  by  the  actual  number  of  divisions  on 
the  ruler,  the  exact  magnifying  power  will  be  determ- 
ined. Thus,  if  it  is  found  that  the  one  space  on  the 
paper  contains  five  spaces  on  the  ruler,  the  magnifying 
power  is  five,  and  the  focus  of  the  lens  2  inches ;  or  if 
ten  spaces,  it  is  ten,  with  a  focus  of  i  inch.  One  or 
several  lenses  in  conjunction  may  be  examined  in  this 
way.  Some  difficulty  may  and  probably  will  be 
experienced  in  seeing  the  divisions  on  the  ruler  and 
on  the  paper  at  the  same  time,  but  this  will  be  over- 
come with  a  little  practice.  Indeed,  it  is  well  to  point 
out  at  this  stage  that  both  eyes  should  be  kept  open  in 
viewing  objects  through  simple  as  well  as  compound 
microscopes,  as  continued  work  can  be  done  with 
infinitely  more  comfort  and,  while  at  first  some  diffi- 
culty may  be  experienced,  it  will  be  found  that  after 
a  little  earnest  effort,  both  eyes  unconsciously  remain 
open  and  the  prominence  with  which  objects  appear 
to  the  unoccupied  eye  diminishes  as  the  mind  becomes 
intent  upon  the  object  it  is  viewing. 


26 


THE  COMPOUND  MICROSCOPE. 

As  has  been  stated  a  magnified  image  is  observed 
in  the  Compound  Microscope.  Any  two  lenses  of 
suitable  focus,  placed  sufficiently  far  apart,  will  attain 
this  object,  and  this  was  for  years  the  method  of 
construction. 

In  any  microscope,  whether  simple  or  compound, 
the  difficulty  of  holding  it  or  the  object  steady  during 
observation  increases  with  the  increase  in  magnifying 
power,  and  in  the  compound  form  with  only  a 
moderately  high  power  it  is  utterly  impossible  to 
retain  sufficient  steadiness  to  make  any  reliable  obser- 
vation. Mechanical  contrivances  therefore  are  a  neces- 
sity and  were  applied  in  the  very  earliest  constructions 
of  the  microscope.  Even  when  such  a  luxury  as  an 
achromatic  lens  was  unknown  they  were  all  made  to 
embody  the  following  essential  parts: 

A  platform  or  stage  for  holding  the  object. 

A  means  of  adjustment  for  properly  focusing  the 
lenses  on  the  object. 

Provisions  for  suitably  illuminating  the  object. 

27 


From  what  may  be  called  a  crude  attainment  of 
these  three  purposes,  the  construction  gradually  became 
more  complex.  Many  additions  have  been  made  which 
have  proven  useful  and  have  remained,  while  others 
have  been  discarded.  As  the  first  microscope  was 
constructed  in  1590,  it  has  required  nearly  three 
centuries  to  bring  the  instrument  up  to  its  present 
general  form,  and  it  is  interesting  to  note  that  many 
improvements  which  have  been  introduced  within  the 
last  forty  or  fifty  years  have  been  used  and  lost  sight 
of  within  this  time. 

While  certain  parts  are  necessary  to  make  up  a 
modern  instrument,  no  one  design  of  construction  is 
followed.  The  forms  are  innumerable,  each  maker 
following  his  own  inclination  in  variety,  design,  number 
of  parts,  and  material.  For  the  latter,  brass  predomin- 
ates, although  bronze  and  iron  are  used  to  a  consider- 
able extent.  The  first  two  metals  are  usually  highly 
finished  and,  as  they  easily  tarnish,  are  protected  by 
lacquer,  which  not  only  is  serviceable  in  this  direction 
when  of  proper  composition  and  rightly  applied,  but 
offers  a  means  of  ornamentation.  Iron  is  covered 
with  a  heavy  coating  of  japan  and  being  dark  is  on 
this  account  often  recommended  as  being  agreeable 
for  the  eyes. 

The  entire  apparatus,  including  the  optical  parts, 
is  called  a  microscope,  whereas,  without  them,  it  is 
termed  a  stand. 

28 


The  microscope  is  called  by  some  a  "  machine  ", 
but  we  earnestly  protest  against  this  harsh  term  being 
applied  to  an  instrument  of  such  precision. 

As  it  is  necessary  for  the  student  to  become 
conversant  with  the  names  of  the  various  parts  and 
to  understand  their  use,  we  give  an  illustration,  Fig.  25, 
with  the  parts  lettered  for  better  identification,  and 
append  a  list  giving  their  names.  We  recommend 
that  they  be  impressed  upon  the  memory,  as  they 
are  the  basis  of  microscopical  language. 

A.  Base,  the  foundation   of  the   instrument.     It 
usually  rests  upon  three  points  (or  should  do  so)  and 
is  of  such    weight  that  it  keeps  the    instrument  firm 
when  it  is  in  an  upright  or    inclined  position.     The 
two  principal  forms  are  the  horseshoe  and  tripod. 

B.  Pillar,  the  vertical  column  which  is  fastened 
to  the  base  and  carries  in  its  upper  end  the  joint  or 
axis  which  is  provided  for  inclining  the  instrument. 
It   generally   consists   of   one   piece,  either  round  or 
square,  but,  in  larger  instruments,  is  often  made  in  two 
columns. 

C.  Arm,  supports  all  the  upper  working  parts  of 
the  instrument  and  carries  the  adjustments  for  focus. 

D.  Body,    the  tube  portion  to  which  the  optical 
parts  are  attached. 

29 


Fig.  25. 


E.  Nose- Piece,  an  extra  piece  which  is  attached 
to  the  lower  part  of  the  tube  to  hold  the  objective. 

Society  Screw,  a  standard  screw  which  is  cut 
into  the* nose-piece  and  is  called  so  from  the  fact  that 
it  was  first  recommended  by  the  Royal  Microscopical 
Society  of  London.  It  is  also  called  the  universal 
screw  and  is  in  general  use  in  this  country. 

F.  Objective,     contains    the    object    lenses,    is 
screwed  into  the  nose-piece  and  is  called  so  because 
it  is  nearest  the  object.     It  is  the  most  important  of  the 
two  optical  parts  (of  the  microscope  proper)  and  upon 
its  perfection  the  distinctness  of  the  image  and  there- 
fore   the    value    of    the    instrument    almost    entirely 
depends. 

G.  Eyepiece  or  Ocular,  the  remaining  optical 
part,   and  called  so  because  it  is  nearest  the  eye.     It 
magnifies  the  image  given  by  the  objective.     This  and 
the  objective  will  be  fully  treated  later  on. 

H.  Draw-Tube,  the  inner  tube  of  the  body  which 
moves  in  the  outer  sheath  and  which  receives  the  eye- 
piece. It  permits  adjustment  for  different  tube  lengths 
and  variations  in  magnifying  power. 

I.  Collar,  a  ring  which  is  attached  to  the  draw- 
tube  and  is  usually  provided  with  a  milled  or  knurled 
edge. 


31 


J.  Coarse  Adjustment,  a  mechanism  for  moving 
the  body  quickly  back  and  forth  for  adjusting  the 
focus  approximately.  It  consists  of  a  slide  attached 
to  the  body,  and  a  straight  rack,  the  former  being 
fitted  to  a  recess,  the  latter  engaging  the  teeth  of  a 
pinion  which  is  stationary  in  the  arm.  In  instruments 
of  very  simple  form  the  coarse  adjustment  is  obtained 
by  fitting  the  body  in  an  outer  stationary  sheath. 

K.  Milled-Heads,  the  large  buttons  attached 
to  the  shanks  of  the  pinion,  which  is  revolved  by 
means  of  them.  They  are  usually  large  to  give 
sensitiveness  to  the  movement,  and  should  be  placed 
wide  apart  so  that  the  fingers  may  be  entirely  free 
from  the  body. 

L.  Micrometer  Screw,  a  fine  screw  provided 
with  milled  head.  It  acts  upon  the  body  either 
directly  or  by  levers.  It  has  a  slow  and  delicate 
movement  and  provides  the  fine  adjustment.  This  as 
well  as  the  coarse  adjustment  should  be  extremely 
sensitive  and  should  not  have  the  least  side  or  lateral 
motion.  The  fact  that  either  of  them  has  it,  is 
evidence  of  poor  workmanship. 

M.  Stage,  consists  of  a  strong  metal  plate,  placed 
at  a  right  angle  to  the  body,  and  provided  with  an 
opening  for  the  passage  of  light  iiom  below.  The 
object  is  placed  upon  it  for  examination. 

32 


Centering  Screws  are  provided  in  some  stands 
for  moving  the  stage  in  different  directions  to  bring 
the  center  of  its  revolving  motion  in  the  center  of 
the  field.  In  a  limited  sense  they  offer  means  of 
mechanical  movement  for  the  object. 

N.  Clips,  two  springs  attached  to  the  upper 
surface  of  the  stage  and  used  to  hold  the  object  in 
position. 

O.  Mirror,  used  for  reflecting  and  condensing 
light  upon  the  object.  As  a  rule  there  are  two  mirrors, 
one  plane  and  the  other  concave.  The  former  gives  a 
comparatively  weak  light,  while  the  latter  concentrates 
it  and  gives  more  intensity. 

P.  Mirror  Bar,  carries  the  mirror  and  is  pivoted 
in  order  to  illuminate  the  object  from  different 
directions. 

Q.  Substage,  a  tube  or  attachment  below  the 
stage,  of  standard  size,  to  receive  various  accessories 
which  may  be  required.  It  is  sometimes  immovably 
fixed  to  the  stage  but  in  the  best  instruments  is  pro- 
vided with  an  adjustment  to  vary  its  distance  from  the 
object. 

S.  Diaphragm,  a  provision  for  increasing  or 
decreasing  the  amount  of  light  which  illuminates  the 
object. 


33 


Optical  Axis,  an  imaginary  line  which  passes 
from  the  center  of  the  eyepiece  through  the  centers  of 
the  body,  objective,  stage  and  substage  to  the  mirror. 
Whatever  lies  in  it  is  said  to  be  centered. 

Object,  that  which  is  examined. 

Slide  or  Slip,  a  plate  of  glass  upon  which  the 
object  is  placed  or  mounted ;  the  prevailing  standard 
being  3  inches  long  by  i  inch  wide. 

Cover  Glass,  a  thin  piece  of  glass  cut  circular 
or  square,  which  is  placed  upon  the  object,  either  for 
flattening  or  preserving  it,  or  both.  The  thickness 
varies  from  1-50  to  1-250  inch  and  this  variation  has 
a  very  important  bearing  on  the  optical  effect  of  the 
microscope. 

Classification  of  Microscopes.  Until  recently 
microscopes  were  divided  into  two  classes,  the  Jackson 
and  the  Ross  models.  While  the  latter  was  for  many 
years  very  popular,  particularly  with  the  English 
makers,  it  has  been  almost  entirely  superseded  by  the 
Jackson  form,  and  with  good  reason.  In  the  former 
the  means  of  adjustment  were  applied,  as  near  as 
consistent  with  the  construction,  to  the  body  tube; 
whereas  in  the  Ross  form  they  were  placed  at  the  back 
or  more  distant  point  in  the  instrument,  thus  increasing 
by  means  of  the  connecting  arm  the  faults  which  might 
exist  in  the  adjustment. 

34 


A  form  of  stand  which  is  now  very  popular  is 
called  the  Continental  pattern,  from  the  fact  that  it 
was  originally  made  on  the  continent  of  Europe,  and  is 
a  combination  of  the  Jackson  and  the  Ross  models. 
The  coarse  adjustment,  when  consisting  of  a  rack  and 
pinion,  is  placed  close  to  the  tube  while  the  fine  adjust- 
ment is  placed  in  the  arm. 

Tube  Length.  The  Continental  form,  Fig.  25, 
which  is  quite  generally  used  in  all  countries,  has  a 
short  tube  from  160.0  to  170.0  mm.  (6.3  to  6.7  inches) 
whereas  in  England  the  long  tube  from  216.0  to  250.0 
mm.  (8.5  to  10  inches)  is  still  retained  to  a  consider- 
able extent.  The  short  tube  contracts  the  height  of 
the  instrument,  this  being  the  vital  point  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  Continental  stand. 

Until  recently  this  subject  was  given  little  attention, 
each  maker  following  a  standard  which  he  had  adopted 
for  himself.  The  injurious  influence  of  this  diversity 
was  not  appreciated  by  the  public,  as  it  was  not 
acquainted  with  the  products  of  different  makers,  until 
Prof.  S.  H.  Gage  made  it  the  subject  of  a  paper  before 
the  American  Microscopical  Society  and,  as  a  result  of 
his  inquiries,  prepared  the  table  of  standards,  Fig.  26, 
followed  by  the  different  makers. 

Acting  on  his  suggestion  a  committee  was  appointed 
to  consider  this  subject,  as  well  as  that  of  eyepiece, 
objective  and  thickness  of  cover  glass,  to  which  we  will 

35 


a 

Parts  included 
in  Tube-length. 
See  Diagram. 

r  Grunow, 

Tube  -length 
in 
Millimeters. 

203 

t.: 

X^- 

- 

-J£ 

E.  Leitz,     - 

170 

-£ 

Nachet  et  Fils, 

146  or 

200 

fl-fl?<  Powell  and  Lealand,   - 

254 

C.  Reichert,     - 
Spencer  Lens  Co., 
,W.  Wales, 

160  to 
235  or 
254 

180 
160 

\ 

^-  — 

•" 

/ 

r  Bausch  &  Lomb  Opt.  Co 

,216  or 

160 

Bezu,  Hausser  et  Cie., 

220 

Klonne  und  Muller,     - 

160-180  or  254 

b-d- 

W.  &  H.  Seibert,      - 

190 

Swift  &  Son, 

165  to 

228% 

C.  Zeiss, 

160  or 

250 

f  Gtmdlach  Optical  Co., 

254 

< 

>- 

1  R.  Winkel,     -        - 

220 

11 

$L-dc-d    Ross  &Co.,     - 

254 

\ 

^  — 

^  — 

— 
x 

2 

^-^     R.  &  J.  Beck,       - 
r-/     J.  Green,  -        - 
—  f           Hartnack,      -        -. 

254 
254 
160-180 

,  — 
^»~_ 

—  . 

__-  -^ 

Verick,   - 
Watson  &  Sons, 

160-200 
160-250 

Fig.  26- 


recur  farther  on,  and  reported  in  favor  of  the  adoption 
of  two  standards  for  tube  length,  viz.,  short  standard 
1 60.0  mm.  (6.3  inches),  long  standard  216  mm.  (8.5 
inches);  that  the  tube  length  shall  be  considered  those 
parts  between  the  upper  end  of  the  tube  where  the 
ocular  is  inserted  and  the  lower  end  of  the  tube  where 
the  objective  is  inserted.  There  are  no  optical  advant- 
ages in  the  one  or  the  other.  The  short  length  is 
almost  a  necessity,  however,  in  the  Continental  pattern 
of  microscopes  as  compactness  is  the  special  desidera- 
tum; but,  while  this  subject  will  be  given  more  extended 
attention  and  optically  considered  farther  on,  it  might 
be  stated  here  that  when  an  objective,  except  perhaps 
in  the  very  low  powers,  is  constructed  to  be  used  with 
a  certain  length  of  tube,  it  should  be  used  with  this 
length  only.  This  statement  cannot  be  made  too 
prominent  and  will  bear  repetition. 

Stage.  This  should  be  of  such  strength  that,  under 
considerable  magnification,  the  object  may  be  moved 
in  different  directions  without  displacement  of  focus. 
This  depends  upon  the  matei  ial  of  which  it  is  made, 
its  thickness,  and  the  strength  of  attachment  between 
it  and  the  arm.  Absolute  ligidity  is  practically  impos- 
sible when  considerable  force  is  exerted,  as  can  easily 
be  determined  in  the  best  instruments,  and  it  is  a 
mistake  to  condemn  an  instrument  for  this  cause  as  is 
sometimes  done.  If  the  object  will  remain  in  fociis 
under  a  high  power  with  a  fair  amount  of  pressure 

37 


above  that  which  is  required  in  moving  the  object 
about,  the  stability  may  be  considered  ample.  In  older 
instruments  the  fault  often  occurred  of  making  the  stage 
unnecessarily  thick,  which  for  present  day  require- 
ments or  with  modern  substage  appliances  would  inter- 
fere with  the  accomplishment  of  the  best  results.  At 
the  present  time  the  stages  of  instruments  from  reput- 
able makers  are  of  ample  strength  without  undue 
thickness  although  in  cheap  foreign  products  this  is  too 
often  not  the  case.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance, 
however,  that  the  surface  of  the  stage  should  be  square 
with  the  tube  in  all  directions.  Any  deviation  pro- 
duces inferior  optical  results.  In  the  better  class  of 
instruments  a  vulcanite  plate  attached  to  the  upper 
part  of  the  stage  has  proven  very  successful.  The 
peculiar  gritty  feeling  due  to  small  particles  of  dust 
between  the  stage  and  slide  is  not  so  noticeable  as  on 
a  metal  surface,  and  it  is  not  much  affected  by  acids  or 
alkalies  and  will  therefore  retain  its  neat  appearance 
almost  indefinitely. 

Revolving  Stage.  While  in  the  largest  number 
of  instruments  the  stage  is  fixed  and  generally  square, 
there  are  others  in  which  it  is  revolving,  that  is,  may 
be  revolved  around  the  optical  axis.  Such  a  stage  is 
an  absolute  necessity  in  the  examination  of  crystals 
and  rock  sections,  for  which  pjurpose  graduations  in 
degrees  or  fractions  of  degrees,  by  means  of  which 
the  angles  of  the  objects  may  be  measured,  are  pro- 

38 


vided.  It  is  supplied  in  most  of  the  better  class  of 
instruments  and  is  a  convenience  in  almost  all  kinds 
of  microscopical  work.  As  a  slight  deviation  of  the 
center  of  revolving  motion  from  exact  coincidence  with 
the  optical  axis  will  cause  the  object  to  swing  out  of 
the  field,  centering  screws  are  provided  by  which  this 
error  can  be  quickly  corrected.  These  screws  are 
also  convenient,  within  narrow  limits,  in  providing  a 
mechanical  method  of  moving  the  object  in  different 
directions  over  the  field  of  view.  It  sometimes  occurs, 
as  the  stage  is  revolved,  that  an  object  at  the  edge 
of  the  field,  which  is  in  focus,  gradually  becomes 
indistinct,  showing  poorest  at  the  half  revolution  and 
as  the  stage  is  brought  around  to  the  first  point  again 
comes  into  focus.  This  may  be  due  to  poor  fitting  of 
the  parts,  or  to  the  fact  that  the  stage  is  not  square  in  all 
directions  with  the  body;  in  either  case  a  serious  defect. 

Glass  Stage.     This  with  the  slide  carrier,  Fig.  27, 
is  a  device  for  moving  the  object  more  steadily  and 

smoothly    than     can    be 
directly    on 
It    is    made 


done 


the 

stage.  It  is  made  de- 
tachable from  the  micro- 
scope and  consists  of  a 
glass  plate,  in  a  metal 
frame,  upon  which  the 
slide  carrier,  resting  on  four  points,  moves.  At  each 
end  a  spring  clip  passes  around  the  glass  plate  and 


27. 


39 


presses  against  its  lower  surface,  thus  offering  the 
minimum  of  friction,  with  sufficient  resistance  to  make 
an  easy  movement. 

Mechanical  Stage.  This  is  a  very  important 
form  in  which  the  movements  are  mechanical,  in  two 
directions  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  motion  being 
transmitted  through  the  milled  heads  by  a  rack  and 
pinion  or  screw.  It  is  a  most  useful  accessory  and 
with  it  work  can  be  done  systematically  and  rapidly 
with  the  assurance  that  every  portion  of  the  field  has 
been  covered  and  with  a  degree  of  comfort  which  must 
be  experienced  to  be  appreciated.  For  instance,  in  a 
bacteriological  or  urinary  specimen,  where  one  is 
searching  the  field  for  certain  objects,  it  is  the  only 
reliable  means  of  covering  each  portion  of  it.  This 
stage  is  especially  valuable  for  blood  counting  and 
plankton  work.  While  not  many  years  ago  it  was 
spurned  by  many  scientists  as  a  toy,  it  is  now  generally 
accepted  as  an  invaluable  part  of  a  microscope.  In 
order  to  be  so,  however,  it  must  be  of  the  most  perfect 
workmanship,  which  is  difficult  to  attain  on  account  of 
the  necessarily  small  parts  of  which  it  is  composed  and 
the  hard  usage  which  it  must  bear.  The  movements 
must  be  smooth  and  easy  and  on  reversing  the  milled 
heads,  must  not  show  any  lost  motion  or  dead  point. 
A  great  deal  of  attention  and  ingenuity  has  been 
applied  in  the  development  of  the  modern  mechanical 

40 


stage.  In  its  early  construction  it  was  heavily  built 
and  of  a  thickness  which  would  make  it  unsuitable  for 
use  with  modern  substage  accessories. 

There  are  two  different  types,  fixed  and  attachable. 
In  the  fixed,  which   is  generally   also   revolving,   the 


Fig.  28. 

mechanical  parts  are  attached  to  and  form  an  integral 
part  of  the  stage.  The  Attachable  Stage,  Fig.  28,  is 
complete  in  itself,  being  attachable  to  the  microscope, 
and  may  be  removed  at  will.  Both  are  provided  with 
graduations,  usually  divisions  in  millimeters,  in  both 
directions  by  which  one  may  read  off  the  amount  of 
space  which  is  covered  and  locate  the  position  of  an 
object  for  future  reference. 


In  using  the  mechanical  stage,  it  should  first  be 
determined  how  many  spaces,  or  how  much  of  one  space 
is  contained  within  the  limits  of  the  field ;  then  begin 
at  one  edge  of  the  specimen  and  with  the  lateral 
movement  (right  to  left  or  vice  versa)  make  it 

pass  across  the  field.  Move  the  slide  forward  with 
the  vertical  movement  the  amount  of  space  which  has 
been  previously  determined  and  by  a  return  action  of 
the  lateral  movement,  bring  it  across  again  and  thus 
through  the  entire  specimen,  or  until  the  object  is 

found. 

Nose -Piece.  This  being  the  lower  end  of  the 
body,  to  which  the  objectives  are  attached,  it  is  import- 
ant in  so  far  as  it  must  be  accurately  made.  As  has 
been  stated,  it  has  the  society  screw.  Previous  to  1857 
each  maker  followed  a  standard  of  his  own  and  this  to 
a  great  extent  is  still  the  case  on  the  Continent.  The 
Royal  Microscopical  Society,  of  London,  appreciating 
the  inconvenience  of  this  diversity,  recommended  a 
standard  thread  of  thirty-six  to  the  inch  with  an  external 
diameter  of  0.8  inch,  which  was  finally  adopted  in 
England  and  this  country.  The  Society  supplied  to 
the  makers  a  so-called  standard  hob  or  tap  with  which 
to  gauge  the  thread.  Unhappily,  however,  these  taps 
have  not  been  made  to  a  standard,  as  there  is  a 
variation  in  those  which  are  sent  out  by  the  Society, 
so  that,  while  the  public  is  under  the  impression  that 

42 


there  are  fixed  dimensions,  there  is  on  this  account  a 
diversity  in  the  products  of  different  makers ;  hence  it 
often  happens  that  the  objectives  of  one  maker  will  not 
fit  the  stands  of  others.  The  writer  in  1884  read  a 
paper  on  this  subject  before  the  American  Micro- 
scopical Society  and  as  a  result  a  committee  was 
appointed  to  bring  about  a  better  state  of  affairs.  It 
failed,  however,  in  obtaining  the  co-operation  of  the 
Royal  Microscopical  Society,  the  main  reason  being 
the  expense  involved,  so  that  we  must  continue  to 
suffer  until  some  concerted  action  is  taken  by  the 
manufacturers  themselves,  which  we  trust  will  not  be 
far  distant. 

Revolving  Nose-Pieces.  Changing  one  objective 
for  another  to  obtain  a  different  power  is  time  consum- 
ing and  inconvenient;  besides, 
there   is  danger  of  dropping 
the     objective    and    thus    a 
liability  of  injuring  it  or  dis- 
turbing   or     destroying     the 
Fig-  29<  object.      To    avoid  this    the 

double,  the  triple,  and  quadruple  nose-pieces  are  offered, 
to  the  first  of  which  two,  to  the  next  three,  and  to 
the  quadruple  four  objectives  may  be  attached  in 
such  a  manner  that,  when  fixed  to  the  nose-piece  of 
the  microscope,  each  objective  may  in  turn  be  brought 
into  use  by  rotating  the  nose-piece.  Each  objective 

43 


comes  to  the  center  and  will  be  in  focus,  if  not  exactly, 
at  any  rate  very  closely.  This  statement  should  per- 
haps be  modified  in  so  far  that  as  the  nose-piece  is 
rotated  each  objective  should  be  approximately  in  focus 
when  in  position,  since  objectives  and  nose-pieces  are 
still  supplied  by  makers  with  which  this  is  not  the  case. 
Of  all  the  convenient  accessories  these  are  the  most 
useful  and  in  most  common  use,  the  writer  knowing 
from  experience  that  nearly  all  of  the  instruments  sold 
for  personal  use  are  supplied  with  the  double  nose- 
piece  when  two  objectives  are  used,  and  the  triple 
when  three  are  taken. 

Bodies  or  Tubes.  These  are  of  two  kinds: 
monocular,  having  one  body  which  may  contain  one 
or  two  draw-tubes,  observations  being  made  with  one 
eye,  and  binocular  for  observation  with  both  eyes,  the 
two  tubes  being  fixed  together  at  the  nose-piece  and 
gradually  separating  until  they  reach  the  pupillary 
distance.  The  first  is  a  monocular  microscope,  the 
second  a  binocular  microscope. 

While  the  methods  for  transmitting  the  rays  from 
the  objective  to  the  binocular  tubes  vary,  the  construc- 
tion in  most  common  use  is  that  introduced  by 
Mr.  Wenham. 

By  reference  to  Fig.  30  it  will  be  seen  that  the  rays 
from  one-half  the  objective  are  transmitted  uninter- 
ruptedly to  the  vertical  tube,  while  the  prism  intercepts 

44 


the  rays  from  the  other 
half  and  reflects  them 
into  the  oblique  tube. 
The  result  is  an  image  in 
each  eyepiece,  thus  giv- 
ing stereoscopic  vision. 
This  gives  a  perception 
of  depth,  a  sense  of 
being  able  to  look  into 
an  object,  and  conveys 
to  the  mind  the  im- 
pression of  roundness 
or  separate  appreciation 
of  the  different  planes 
of  the  object  which  it 
is  impossible  to  obtain 
with  monocular  vision. 
Its  use,  however,  is 
limited  to  the  lower 
power  objectives. 

Coarse  Adjust- 
ment. In  providing 
this  adjustment,  two 
methods  are  followed. 
The  most  simple  form  is 
the  sliding  tube  in  which 
the  body  tube,  which 
carries  the  nose-piece  at 
the  lower  end  and  draw- 


Fig.  30. 


45 


tube  at  the  upper  end,  is  moved  up  and  down  in  an  outer 
sheath,  which  is  fastened  to  the  arm.  The  milled  ring 
is  grasped  by  thumb  and  fore  and  middle  fingers  and 
pushed  down  and  drawn  up  with  a  spiral  motion.  It 
is  not  to  be  commended  except  for  economical  reasons, 
as  it  lacks  firmness,  wears  out  quickly  from  the  con- 
siderable friction,  endangers  the  object  and  the 
objective  from  the  liability  to  sudden  or  jerking 
motions  and  does  not  well  permit  the  application  of 
the  double  nose-piece.  While  a  clamping  ring  which 
fastens  the  tube  in  a  fixed  position  is  provided  in  some 
instruments,  especially  to  permit  the  use  of  double 
nose-piece,  this  again  has  its  disadvantages  and  is 
cumbersome.  Therefore  it  is  strongly  recommended 
not  to  purchase  an  instrument  of  this  kind  if  it  can  be 
avoided. 

The  rack  and  pinion  adjustment  is  by  far  preferable 
in  every  respect  and  has  stood  the  test  of  many  years, 
although  efforts  have  been  made  to  introduce  other 
methods,  all  of  which,  however,  have  become  obsolete. 
To  be  satisfactory  and  lasting,  it  must  be  exceedingly 
well  made  and  it  is  safe  to  advise  that  any  instrument 
with  this  adjustment,  which  does  not  work  well  at  the 
outset,  may  be  regarded  as  a  poor  one.  In  late  years 
the  pinion  with  spirally  cut  teeth  and  the  rack  with 
diagonal  ones  has  come  into  common  use  and  is  better 
than  the  older  form  with  straight  cut  teeth.  In  order 
to  make  the  pinion  operative,  bearings  are  provided  for 


it  in  the  arm  and  its  teeth  engage  in  the  rack,  which  is 
fastened  to  a  slide  and  has  its  bearing  in  the  recessed 
vertical  length  of  the  arm,  as  shown  in  Fig.  31. 


Fig.    31. 


This  adjustment  must  meet  the  following  conditions 
and  if  it  does  not,  the  instrument  may  be  safely  con- 
demned as  faulty : 

//  must  work  with  the  utmost  smoothness  and  with 
not  the  least  perceptible  jar  or  grating. 

It  must  be  free  from  lost  motion  when  working  with 
the  highest  powers. 

The  slide  must  be  so  perfectly  fitted,  that  it  shall 
show  no  play  when  the  tube  is  moderately  forced  from 
one  side  to  the  other. 

It  is  opportune  in  this  connection  to  state  that  all 
fittings  involved  in  the  rack  and  pinion  are  necessarily 


47 


delicate  and  great  care  should  be  exercised  in  using 
the  adjustment  and  keeping  the  parts  free  from  dust. 
Lubrication  should  never  be  necessary  between  the 
teeth  of  the  rack  and  pinion.  When  applied  to  the 
spindles  of  the  pinion  it  should  be  only  a  very  small 
quantity  of  the  best  oil,  and  when  lubricating  the 
sliding  parts,  wipe  these  with  cambric  to  which  a  drop 
of  oil  has  first  been  applied.  A  surplus  amount  of 
oil  acts  as  a  dust  catcher. 

Fine  Adjustment.  While  this  is  constructed  in 
numerous  ways,  in  all  it  depends  upon  a  screw  for  the 
propelling  power.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  slow 
motion,  as  one  revolution  of  the  screw  seldom  gives  more 
than  1-50  inch  motion.  This  screw  is  also  called  the 
micrometer  screw.  The  brass  button  by  which  it  is 
rotated  is  called  its  head  and,  when  it  is  provided  with 
equal  divisions  upon  its  upper  surface,  it  is  the  grad- 
uated head.  In  this  case  a  stationary  index  is  fastened 
to  the  arm. 

The  fine  adjustment,  although  it  should  be  delicate 
and  sensitive,  must,  nevertheless,  be  rigidly  constructed. 
Its  bearings  must  be  large  and  still  free  so  as  to  be 
responsive  to  the  movement  of  the  screw,  and  these 
conditions  must  be  maintained  with  an  endless  amount 
of  use. 

While  the  fine  adjustment,  even  more  than  the 
stage,  will  show  displacement  with  moderate  magnify- 

48 


ing  power  by   a   slight  pressure   against  the  tube,    it 
should  return  to  its  position  when  released. 

If  a  new  instrument  does  not  meet  the  conditions 
here  set  down  for  testing  a  fine  or  coarse  adjustment, 
it  may  be  put  down  as  of  faulty  construction,  no  matter 
by  whom  made  or  how  well  made  it  may  appear  in 
other  respects. 

A  fine  adjustment  should  fullfill  the  following  con- 
ditions : 

The  screw  must  work  freely  and  smoothly,  and 
without  any  side  motion  or  play. 

The  adjustment  should  act  promptly  without  the 
least  particle  of  hesitation  or  lost  motion. 

There  should  not  be  the  slightest  displacement  of  the 
object  in  the  field  when  the  screw-head  is  worked  back 
and  forth. 

Draw-Tube.  While  this  part  of  the  instrument 
may  be  an  advantage  when  judiciously  used,  it  may 
have  an  injurious  influence  when  abused.  It  will  give 
both  short  and  long  tube  standards  and  should  be  pro- 
vided with  a  mark  to  indicate  each  length,  or  should 
have  divisions  by  which  the  standard  can  be  read  off. 
It  should  not  be  overlooked,  that  when  a  double  nose- 
piece  is  used  its  thickness  is  added  to  the  optical  tube 
length  and  the  draw-tube  should  be  shortened  an  equal 
amount.  In  the  cheaper  instruments  the  draw-tube 

49 


simply  slides  in  the  outer  tube,  but  in  the  better  instru- 
ments a  special  spring  sleeve  is  provided  in  which  the 
draw-tube  operates.  As  both  of  these  have  the  defect 
incident  to  the  sliding  tube  adjustment,  a  cloth  lining 
is  preferable  as  the  movement  is  smooth,  while  firm, 
and  will  remain  so  for  an  unlimited  time. 


Correct  position  of  hands  to  operate  draw-tube. 

The  draw-tube  may  be  used  to  vary  the  magnifying 
power,  but  unless  used  judiciously  may  be  the  cause  of 
more  harm  than  good.  While  this  feature  will  be 
touched  upon  again  in  another  chapter,  showing  the 
optical  effect,  it  will  suffice  at  the  present  to  state  that 
it  should  be  used  only  with  objectives  of  low  power  or 
with  high  powers  only  under  well  defined  conditions. 


The  draw-tube  usually  has  at  its  lower  end  a  dia- 
phragm to  prevent  reflection  from  the  inner  surfaces  of 
the  tubes,  and  this  also  sometimes  has  a  society  screw 
for  attaching  very  low  power  objectives  or  accessories. 

Care  should  be  used  in  moving  the  draw-tube  as  a 
too  sudden  movement  upward  may  draw  the  main  tube 
with  it  and  thus  injure  the  rack  and  pinion,  or  down- 
ward, may  force  the  objective  onto  the  object  or  by  the 
compression  of  air  in  the  tube,  may  force  out  the  eye- 
piece. To  operate  the  draw-tube,  hold  the  main  tube 
with  one  hand  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore- finger 
of  the  other  grasp  the  milled  edge  of  draw-tube  and 
move  it  up  or  down  with  spiral  movement. 

Base.  A  judicious  form  and  weight  of  base 
adds  greatly  to  the  stability  of  the  microscope  and  it  is 
a  too  common  fault  that  in  many  instruments,  even 
from  reputable  makers,  this  essential  feature  is  sacri- 
ficed from  wrong  motives  of  economy,  portability  or 
compactness.  While  it  can  hardly  be  expected  that 
when  the  arm  is  inclined  to  the  horizontal  position  the 
microscope  shall  be  stable,  as  it  is  never  used  in 
this  position  except  for  photography,  and  must  then  be 
clamped  to  the  table,  it  is  but  reasonable  to  demand 
that  when  the  instrument  is  upright  or  slightly  inclined 
under  ordinary  manipulative  operations,  it  should  not 
be  required  that  the  base  be  held  with  one  hand  while 
the  other  makes  the  adjustments.  We  can  imagine 

51 


nothing  more  aggravating  than  a  lack  of  stability. 
A  considerable  weight  directly  under  the  pillar  is  of 
little  value,  and  a  great  expansion  of  the  resting  points 
with  extreme  thinness  is  little  better.  There  should 
be  a  combination  of  both  qualities  and  if  suitable  pro- 
portions are  not  maintained,  an  excess  can  hardly  be 
called  a  fault,  whereas  too  little  would  certainly  be. 

Joint  for  Inclination.  This  should  work 
smoothly  but  firmly,  and  the  arm  should  remain  in 
any  position  in  which  it  is  placed.  If  it  has  a  gritty 
sensation,  the  two  parts  are  liable  to  "  eat  "  and  finally 
reach  a  point  where  they  cannot  be  moved. 

Besides  the  above  qualification  a  good  joint  should 
work  without  the  slightest  back-lash  when  the  arm  is 
worked  quickly  back  and  forth  through  small  arc. 

When  the  arm  comes  against  the  stop  for  upright 
position  it  should  not  lean  forward. 

Mirror  and  Mirror-Bar.  The  proper  illumina- 
tion of  an  object  is  an  important  feature  and  although 
there  are  numerous  accessories  for  properly  accomplish- 
ing this,  the  mirrors  alone  are  effective  agents  when 
properly  constructed  and  applied,  particularly  when  no 
high  magnification  is  used.  The  plane  mirror  is 
generally  used  with  very  low  powers  and  reflects  light 
in  about  its  original  intensity.  The  concave  mirror, 
however,  is  intended  to  concentrate  the  light  so  that 
all  the  rays  which  strike  its  surface  are  reflected  and 


come  together  at  some  point  above,  and  the  rays  from 
the  surface  being  contained  within  a  comparatively 
small  space,  cause  an  increased  intensity.  This  point 
is  called  'the  focal  point  and  usually  coincides  with  the 
opening  of  the  stage  when  parallel  rays  such  as  from 
the  sky  are  used.  When  the  light  comes  from  a  source 
considerably  nearer  to  the  mirror,  as  from  a  lamp,  and 
the  rays  are  diverging,  the  focal  distance  becomes  con- 
siderably Ignger.  Some  of  the  intensity  is  lost  in 
consequence  as  well  as  the  degree  of  convergence. 
For  this  reason  some  mirror-bars  are  so  arranged  that 
the  distance  of  the  mirror  from  the  stage  may  be  varied 
to  accommodate  the  variation  in  the  location  of  the 
source  of  light.  While  this  is  of  considerable  aid, 
there  is  in  some  instruments  not  sufficient  room  for  a 
complete  accommodation,  with  the  result  that,  under 
certain  conditions,  the  utmost  effectiveness  of  the 
microscope  is  not  obtained. 

Substage  Diaphragm.  This  is  provided  for 
regulating  the  amount  of  light.  While  it  should  be 
possible  to  use  the  mirror  at  its  utmost  capacity,  it  very 
often  occurs  that  for  certain  investigations  a  profusion 
of  light  is  more  harmful  than  otherwise.  When  there  is 
too  much  light  objects  are  said  to  be  drowned  in  it,  and 
this  often  makes  it  impossible  to  determine  structure. 
An  intelligent  use  of  the  diaphragm  is  of  great  service. 

The  revolving  diaphragm  is  the  most  simple  and 
consists  of  a  black  disk  which  rotates  on  a  pivot  and 

53  '      • 


is  perforated  with  a  series  of  openings  of  different  sizes, 
each  of  which  may  be  brought  into  the  optical  axis. 

Besides  this  there  are  other  forms  which  may  be 
said  to  be  better — for  instance  the  so-called  cap  dia- 
phragms, which  require  a  separate  piece  for  each 
aperture  and  which  are  held  by  a  special  substage 
receiver.  There  are  usually  three  cap  diaphragms, 
each  one  having  an  aperture  of  different  size,  and 
when  attached  are  located  below  and  near  the  object. 
While  the  results  obtained  are  much  better  than  with 
a  revolving  diaphragm,  a  change  of  diaphragm  is 
inconvenient  as  it  involves  the  removal  of  the  slide 
from  the  stage  or  the  receiver  from  below  the  stage. 
An  improved  form  has  of  late  years  been  applied  to 
the  better  instruments  in  the  iris  diaphragm,  which 
consists  of  a  series  of  thin  overlapping  blades  placed 
around  a  central  opening  the  size  of  which  may  be 
varied  by  means  of  a  lever  or  milled  edge  operating 
the  blades.  Besides  the  possibilities  of  varying  the 
size  of  the  aperture  there  should  be  an  adjustment  for 
changing  the  distance  from  the  object.  The  distance 
of  the  diaphragm  from  the  object  is  one  of  considerable 
importance.  The  best  position  is  just  below  the  sur- 
face of  the  stage,  but  as  this  is  not  always  possible,  it 
should  be  as  near  as  conditions  will  permit.  Very 
recently  it  has  been  possible  so  to  construct  the  iris 
diaphragm,  that  it  passes  up  through  the  opening  of  the 
stage  and  may  thus  be  brought  very  close  to  the  object. 

54 


OBJECTIVES  AND   EYEPIECES. 

In  taking  up  this  subject  we  would  say  at  the  outset 
that  it  is  fraught  with  difficulties,  as  almost  all  of  the 
features  are  based  on  scientific  facts  which  can  be  best 
explained  by  mathematical  formulae,  but  as  it  is  our 
purpose  to  give  intelligible  explanations  to  those  who 
may  not  be  conversant  with  algebraic  expressions, 
many  of  the  statements  and  descriptions  will  appear 
rather  dogmatic.  We  can  but  advise  those  who  wish 
to  study  the  subject  further,  to  consult  such  books  as 
contain  more  explicit  information. 

For  the  purpose  of  simplicity  the  compound  micro- 
scope has  up  to  this  time  been  spoken  of  as  being 
composed  of  two  lenses,  the  lower  of  which  magnifies 
the  object  and  the  upper  magnifies  the  image  formed 
by  the  lower  lens.  While  this  expresses  the  principle, 
as  a  matter  of  fact  the  microscope  is  never  so  con- 
structed as  the  defects  of  chromatic  and  spherical  aber- 
rations would  be  more  pronounced  than  in  the  simple 
microscope,  even  to  such  an  extent  as  to  nullify  the 
benefit  which  might  be  derived  from  the  increased 
magnifying  power  alone.  In  fact,  magnifying*  power  in 
itself  is  of  very  little  value  without  the  attributes 

55 


obtained  from  the  chromatic  and  spherical  corrections. 
The  objective  as  well  as  the  eyepiece  is  always  com- 
posed of  a  series  of  lenses,  the  purpose  of  which  will 
be  explained  as  we  proceed.  The  advent  of  achro- 
matic lenses  was  the  first  decisive  step  in  advance  and 
has  been  the  foundation  of  all  latter  improvements  and 
the  high  standard  of  the  best  production  of  the  present 
day. 

It  is  a  matter  of  pride  to  Americans  to  note  that 
two  of  our  countrymen,  now  deceased,  were  influential 
in  furthering  the  progress  to  a  considerable  extent,  and 
their  memories  should  always  be  honored  by  the  micro- 
scopical world.  They  should  be  remembered  with 
feelings  of  gratitude,  particularly  as  the  compensation 
for  their  efforts  was  extremely  limited.  The  pioneer  in 
microscopical  optics  in  this  country  was  Charles  E. 
Spencer  who  was  followed  by  Robert  B.  Tolles,  and 
while  both  men  did  a  great  amount  of  original  advanced 
work,  it  is  the  latter,  particularly,  who,  by  his  wonderful 
achievements,  created  a  great  discussion  in  European 
circles,  by  obtaining  results  which  for  a  long  time  it 
was  claimed  could  not  be  accomplished. 

Of  inestimable  value  to  the  scientific  world  have 
been  the  labors  of  that  most  capable  and  genial  gentle- 
man, Prof.  E.  Abbe,  of  Jena,  to  whom,  while  best 
known  to  the  general  microscopist  for-  some  of  his 
more  insignificant  improvements,  such  as  the  Abbe 
condenser,  camera  lucida,  apertometer  and  apochromatic 

56 


objectives,  we  are  much  more  indebted  for  his  profound 
disclosure  of  the  principles  of  microscopical  optics, 
as  well  as  to  the  combined  efforts  of  himself  and 
Dr.  Schott  for  their  labors  in  the  art  of  glass  making 
and  to  the  large  variety  of  glass  which  they  have 
placed  at  the  disposal  of  opticians,  who  by  this  means 
have  been  able  to  accomplish  much  higher  results 
than  would  otherwise  have  been  the  case.  All  of  the 
ordinary  kinds  of  glass,  faultless  as  they  may  appear, 
are  entirely  unsuitable  for  use  in  the  production  of  the 
higher  grade  of  optical  instruments.  The  production 
of  optical  glass  for  this  use  is  fraught  with  many  diffi- 
culties. It  must  be  absolutely  homogeneous,  free  from 
impurities  and  unchangeable  under  varying  climatic 
conditions.  The  mere  fact  of  the  existence  of  air 
bubbles,  while  undesirable,  is  not  necessarily  a  defect, 
as  it  has  been  found  impossible  to  produce  certain 
kinds  of  glass  without  them. 

The  amount  of  injury  due  to  air  bubbles  is  in  the 
loss  of  light,  and  as  microscope  lenses  are  small  the 
percentage  of  this  loss  may  be  considerable,  therefore 
bubbles  are  carefully  avoided. 

In  this  connection  it  is  opportune  to  state  that  the 
production  of  this  glass,  generally  termed  Jena  glass, 
has  been  taken  advantage  of  by  unscrupulous  parties 
in  creating  the  impression  that  the  bare  fact  of  using 
this  glass  gives  in  itself  much  better  results.  Such  is 
not  at  all  the  case.  The  merit  of  the  production  con- 

57 


sists  mainly  in  the  large  variety  of  glass  with  different 
ratios  of  refractive  index  and  dispersive  power,  and  its 
effectiveness  in  lens  making  depends  entirely  on  its 
intelligent  use  by  the  optician. 

As  defects  in  the  objective  have  already  been 
specially  mentioned,  it  will  at  this  point  be  well  to  state 
that  while  an  achromatic  lens  is  unnecessary  in  the 
eyepiece,  a  supplementary  lens  below  and  near  the 
upper  lens  has  been  found  beneficial  in  so  affecting  the 
image,  by  collecting  the  rays,  that  it  can  be  viewed  at 
one  glance  and  without  spherical  or  chromatic  aberra- 
tion. For  this  reason  the  lower  lens  is  called  the 
field  or  collective  lens,  and  the  upper  lens  the  eye  lens. 
These  lenses  are  mounted  in  a  tube  with  fixed 
relations,  and  are  then  called  the  eyepiece  or  ocular. 
In  the  diagram,  Fig.  32,  the  course  of  rays  from  the 
object  through  the  objective  and  eyepiece  is  shown. 
g  h  represents  the  objective,  /  /  the  field  lens  and  op 
the  eye  lens  of  the  eyepiece.  As  the  rays  from  the 
object  pass  through  the  objective  they  are  seen  to  cross 
before  reaching  the  field  lens,  are  converged  as  they 
pass  through,  and  further  converged  by  the  eye  lens  op. 
At  the  point  c  d  they  form  a  real  image  of  the  object, 
which  can  readily  be  seen  by  placing  a  ground  glass  or 
piece  of  oiled  paper  at  this  point.  It  is  an  interesting 
experiment  and  one  which  we  recommend  trying. 
The  eye  lens  enlarges  this  image  and  forms  a  greatly 
magnified  virtual  image  at  e  f.  From  this  diagram 

58 


Fig.  32. 


several  changes  with  consequent  results  can  be  noted  : 

If  the  objective  is  of  shorter  focal  length,  a  larger 
real  image  is  formed  at  c  d. 

If  the  distance  between  objective  and  eyepiece  is 
increased,  a  larger  real  image  is  formed  at  c  d. 

If  the  eyepiece  is  of  higher  power,  a  larger  virtual 
image  is  formed  at  e  f. 

In  the  same  manner  a  reduced  magnifying  power 
may  be  obtained  by  reversing  these  conditions. 

As  has  already  been  stated,  a  i  inch  lens  with  a 
distance  of  ten  inches  between  it  and  the  image  gives 
a  power  of  ten  diameters,  and  the  eyepiece  multiplies 
the  virtual  image  by  the  extent  of  its  power.  From 
this  it  can  be  easily  computed  that  with  a  i  inch 
objective  used  with  a  tube  length  of  ten  inches  and 
i  inch  eyepiece,  a  magnifying  power  of  lox  10  =  100 
will  be  obtained ;  or  the  same  combination  with  a  tube 
length  of  five  inches  will  give  one-half  this  power  or 
fifty. 

Objectives  are  divided  into  two  classes,  dry  and 
immersion.  In  the  dry  objectives  there  is  no  interven- 
ing medium  other  than  air  between  the  lowest  lens 
surface  of  the  objective  and  the  upper  surface  of  the 
cover  glass.  In  the  immersion  objective  a  liquid  fills 
this  space.  From  this  fact  it  is  easily  seen  that  liquid 
can  only  be  used  with  objectives  which  are  quite  close  to 
the  cover  and  therefore  short  focus  or  high  power,  and 
so,  on  the  other  hand,  objectives  of  long  focus  or  low 

60 


power  can  not  be  immersion.  The  purpose  of  immer- 
sion is  to  obtain  higher  optical  results ;  is  in  fact  a 
necessary  condition,  and  an  objective  which  is  con- 
structed as  a  dry  one  cannot  be  used  as  an  immersion, 
and  vice  versa.  Although  there  have  been  objectives 
constructed  which  can  be  used  both  as  immersion  and 
dry,  they  have  gone  into  disuse  as  they  must  suffer 
when  used  in  one  or  the  other  direction  or  in  both. 

Water  was  for  many  years  used  as  immersion  fluid, 
but  specially  prepared  cedar  oil  was  found  to  give 
better  results  and  has  almost  entirely  taken  its  place. 
The  refractive  and  dispersive  properties  of  cedar  oil 
are  almost  identical  with  those  of  crown  glass,  and  as 
cover  glass  has  very  nearly  the  same  properties  as 
crown  glass,  the  term  homogeneous  immersion  fluid  is 
often  applied  to  the  oil,  but  for  brevity,  objectives 
which  are  constructed  to  be  used  with  it  are  called 
oil  immersion. 

Tube  Length.  Objectives  are  constructed  and 
their  aberrations  corrected  for  the  length  of  tube  with 
which  they  are  to  be  used,  and  as  has  been  shown  in 
a  previous  chapter  there  are  now  two  generally  accepted 
standards.  They  are  corrected  for  either  the  long  or 
short  tube  and  specially  marked  by  progressive  firms, 
and  it  is  hoped  that  in  time  this  will  become  a  universal 
custom.  When  an  objective  is  not  marked  the 
purchaser  should  require  to  know  the  tube  length  with 
which  it  is  to  be  used. 

61 


Nomenclature,  or  Rating  of  Objectives. 
While  for  many  years  objectives  were  marked  arbi- 
trarily by  makers  and  differently  by  each  maker  to 
designate  the  power,  it  is  now  customary  to  nnark 
objectives  so  that  the  figures  shall  indicate  the  true 
optical  value — on  the  continent  of  Europe  in  milli- 
meters and  in  England  and  this  country  in  inches. 
Objectives  are  rated  according  to  their  equivalent 
focus.  The  equivalent  focus  of  a  series  or  combination 
of  lenses  is  the  same  as  the  focus  of  a  single  lens 
having  the  same  magnifying  power  as  the  series  or 
combination.  This  is  also  true  of  eyepieces.  So,  if 
two  combinations  equal  in  magnifying  power  a  single 
lens  of  i  inch  focus  they  are  marked  i  inch  or 
25.4  mm.,  or  if  a  collection  of  four  lenses  is  equal  to  a 
lens  of  1-12  inch  focus  it  is  marked  1-12  inch,  or  2  mm. 
Magnifying  power  increases  in  proportion  to  the 
•decrease  in  focal  length,  so  that  a  1-12  inch  objective, 
for  instance,  will  give  a  real  image  twelve  times  larger 
than  a  i  inch  or,  with  a  tube  length  of  ten  inches,  a  real 
magnification  of  120  diameters. 

Powers.  According  to  their  magnifying  power, 
objectives  are  called  low,  medium,  or  high  power  and 
are  classified  by  Carpenter  as  follows : 

Low  powers,  3  inch,  2  inch,  11-2  inch,  i  inch,  3-4 
inch,  2-3  inch. 

Medium  powers,  1-2  inch,  4-10  inch,  1-4  inch, 
1-5  inch. 

62 


High  powers,   1-6   inch,    1-8  inch,    1-10   inch,    1-12 
inch,  1-16  inch,  1-20  inch,  1-25  inch. 

t 
It  might  be  stated  that  such  powers  as   1-20  and 

1-25  inch  are  very  rarely  constructed  at  the  present 
time  and  that  the  1-16  inch  may  be  considered  the 
maximum,  although  seldom  used.  The  1-12  inch  is 
the  highest  which  is  ordinarily  used  and  will  give  all 
the  optical  advantages,  while  the  higher  powers  involve 
so  many  mechanical  difficulties  as  to  increase  the  cost 
of  production  very  considerably  and  as  a  rule  rather 
detract  from  than  add  to  the  optical  qualities. 

While  the  above  list  of  objectives  comprises  the 
variety  of  powers  generally  offered  by  makers,  exper- 
ience in  the  different  courses  of  study  has  shown  that 
certain  objectives,  and  these  generally  in  sets,  are 
most  suitable.  Thus  with  the  short  tube  the  2-3  is 
generally  used  for  a  low  power,  with  the  1-6  and  less 
frequently  the  1-8  for  a  medium,  and  the  1-12  oil 
immersion  for  a  high  power.  With  the  long  tube  the 
3-4  and  1-5  are  usually  selected  with  the  1-12  for  a 
high  power.  When  the  work  requires  low  and  medium 
powers  only,  the  11-2  and  1-2  are  preferable.  Of  the 
low  powers  the  2,  i  1-2  or  i  inch  are  used.  The  3  inch 
and  lower  powers  are  rarely  required,  except  in  photo- 
graphy, as  the  magnifying  power  is  not  much  greater 
than  that  obtained  by  a  good  pocket  magnifier. 


Special  Objectives.  While  objectives  are 
divided  into  two  classes,  and  although  there  are  objec- 
tives, distinguished  by  specific  names,  of  more  com- 
plicated construction  and  greater  capacity  than  .those 
generally  employed,  there  are  other  objectives,  designed 
for  special  purposes,  which  are  not  suitable  for  ordinary 
investigations.  An  exception  may  be  made  in  the 
so-called  variable  objective,  a  low  power  objective  in 
which  a  variation  in  power  is  possible  by  varying  the 
distance  of  the  lenses  by  mechanical  means. 

.  Illuminating  Objectives.  These  are  absolutely 
necessary  in  metallurgical  investigations  and  for  examin- 
ing rulings  on  metallic  surfaces.  The  powers  used  range 
between  11-2  and  1-2  inch.  A  rectangular  prism  is  fixed 
back  of  the  front  lens  with  the  diagonal  surface  over 
and  covering  one-half  of  its  opening.  The  light  passes 
into  the  prism  from  the  side  of  the  microscope  and  is 
deflected  by  the  diagonal  surface  of  the  prism  through 
the  front  lens,  which,  acting  as  a  condenser,  concen- 
trates the  light  on  the  surface  of  the  object.  The 
remaining  one-half  of  the  objective  serves  in  the  usual 
way  to  form  the  image.  Satisfactory  as  these  objectives 
are,  they  are  almost  useless  on  ordinary  opaque  objects 
on  account  of  the  reflections  due  to  the  prism. 

Photographic  Microscope  Objectives.  The 
regular  objectives,  especially  low  and  medium  powers, 
are  not  suited  for  photographic  purposes  on  account  of 

64 


lack  of  coincidence  of  the  visual  and  chemical  rays 
on  the  photographic  plate ;  while  an  image  may  be 
sharply  defined  when  viewed  by  the  eye,  that  made  on 
the  plate  will  be  indistinct.  For  very  low  powers 
standard  photographic  lenses  of  short  focus  may  be 
used,  but  the  microscope  objective  requires  its  chro- 
matic corrections  changed  while  retaining  the  focus, 
which  very  much  detracts  from  its  usefulness  for 
regular  microscopical  work. 

While  the  regular  medium  powers  give  fair  results, 
they,  as  well  as  the  low  powers,  should  be  adapted  to 
these  changed  conditions  to  give  the  best  results  and 
particularly  with  a  view  to  obtaining  a  greater  amount 
of  illumination. 

Projection  Objectives.  These  objectives  are 
used  to  throw  an  enlarged  image  of  an  object  on  a 
white  screen  or  wall  fifteen  feet  or  more  from  the 
apparatus. 

Systems.  An  objective  is  said  to  consist  of 
systems  which  may  vary  in  number  from  one  to  four 
or  five.  Two  systems  are  generally  used  in  low 
power  objectives,  three  and  sometimes  four  in  the 
medium  powers,  and  four  or  five  in  the  high  powers. 
They  are  the  individual  portions  consisting  of  one,  two 
or  three  lenses.  When  a  system  is  composed  of  more 
than  one  lens,  the  lenses  are  cemented  together  by 

65 


means  of  a  transparent  (colorless)  cement  in  such  a 
perfect  manner  that  to  the  unpracticed  eye  they  appear 
as  one  piece  of  glass.  An  achromatic  objective  may 
consist  of  a  simple  system  having  two  or  three  lenses, 
or  it  may  have  two,  three  or  four  and  even  five  systems 


d 
h 


Fig.   33. 


with  as  many  as  eight  or  ten  lenses  in  all.  The 
systems  are  called  in  their  order  :  anterior  or  front, 
middle,  and  posterior.  When  a  system  consists  of  two 
lenses  it  is  called  a  doublet,  when  of  three  lenses,  a 
triplet. 

Thus  in  Fig.  jj,  a  is  the  anterior,  m  the  middle, 
and  p  the  posterior  system :  thus  also,  h  is  a  single, 
d  a  double,  t  a  triple,  and  q  a  quadruple  system. 

While  all  the  work  connected  with  the  microscope 
must  be  extremely  accurate,  that  involved  in  the  produc- 
tion of  an  objective  is  of  the  highest  degree  of  accuracy; 
in  fact  there  is  no  production  of  the  human  hand  which 


66 


is  more  delicate  and  one  which  must  be  so  faultless. 
It  will  be  noticed  from  the  diagram  that  objectives  of 
different  power  are  different  in  construction  and  this  is 
also  true  of  objectives  of  the  same  power  but  different 
in  efficiency.  Objective  makers  follow  different  lines 
to  obtain  results,  and  as  a  large  variety  of  glass  is  now 
offered  from  which  to  select,  widely  different  construc- 
tions follow,  which  in  objectives  of  the  same  class  from 
reputable  makers  are  very  similar  in  efficiency. 

The  optical  glass  used  must  be  free  from  defects 
and  must  be  absolutely  permanent  under  all  climatic 
conditions.  This  glass  comes  in  thick  plates  from  the 
maker  and  is  sawed  into  slabs  of  suitable  thickness 
from  which  are  cut  pieces  of  the  requisite  size  for 
lenses.  These  are  then  cut  into  lens  form  and  the 
various  processes  of  grinding,  polishing,  and  edging 
follow.  The  control  of  work  in  these  various  steps 
must  be  absolute.  There  must  be  no  pit  holes  or 
scratches,  no  variation  in  thickness  or  diameter,  and 
the  surfaces  must  be  so  perfect  that  all  mechanical 
means  of  measurement  fail  and  recourse  must  be  had 
to  highly  sensitive  optical  tests  to  determine  errors. 
The  difficulties  increase  with  the  increase  in  the  power, 
as  all  defects  are  magnified  to  the  extent  of  the  magni- 
fying power  of  the  microscope,  and  furthermore  the 
difficulties  of  handling  and  manipulating  the  lenses 
become  more  serious  as  the  lenses  become  smaller. 
The  lenses  are  then  mated  and  cemented,  set  and  fixed 

6? 


in  suitably  recessed  brass  mountings,  carefully  main- 
taining distances  and  exact  coincidence  with  the  optical 
axis.  No  matter  how  perfect  lenses  may  be  up  to,  this 
point,  negligence  in  mounting  will  make  them  utterly 
useless.  Especially  difficult  is  the  setting  of  the  minute 
front  lenses  of  the  medium  and  high  powers,  the  latter 
being  smaller  than  an  ordinary  pin  head.  The  amount 
of  metal  which  fixes  them  in  position  is  necessarily 
very  small,  and  the  mounting  thin,  and  although  they 
are  firmly  set  they  are  extremely  sensitive  to  any  blow 
or  unusual  pressure.  The  greatest  care  must  also  be 
used  in  cementing  lenses  together,  as  the  cement 
between  them  is  an  immeasurably  thin  film,  and  if 
there  is  any  variation  in  radii  of  the  two  surfaces  or  in 
their  spheroidity,  the  cement  will  either  fail  to  fill  out 
the  gap  or  will  be  under  a  strain  which  will  destroy  their 
usefullness.  After  all  these  processes  the  objective 
must  undergo  a  critical  test  under  the  microscope  for 
defects  and  if  it  fails  in  any  one  direction  it  must 
undergo  correction.  On  account  of  the  many  pro- 
cesses and  the  several  directions  in  which  faults  may 
exist  this  is  often  very  difficult.  It  sometimes  happens 
that  one  or  another  piece  of  glass  possesses  faults  which 
were  not  previously  recognizable,  or  that  there  are 
slight  variations  in  the  refractive  power  of  one  or 
another  kind  of  glass,  either  of  which  may  be  fatal  to- 
good,  results ;  at  any  rate,  whatever  faults  may  exist, 
they  must  be  entirely  eliminated ;  the  final  result  must 

68 


be  an  objective  fully  up  to  the  standard  previously 
established  by  the  maker,  and  in  all  objectives  of  the 
same  class  there  must  be  no  noticeable  variation. 

The  foregoing  is  given  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  all 
objectives,  particularly  the  higher  powers,  are  unusually 
accurate  and  delicate  productions,  and  that  unusual 
care  should  be  observed  in  their  use  to  retain  their 
efficiency.  This  too  often  is  not  the  case.  There  \is 
no  reason  why  under  ordinary  conditions  an  objective 
should  not  last  a  life  time  with  daily  use.  Ordinary 
care  and  cleanliness  will  accomplish  this.  Neverthe- 
less, to  be  more  specific,  observation  of  the  following 
simple  rules  may  be  of  aid : 

Do  not  allow  an  object  ire  to  drop. 

Do  not  allow  the  front  of  the  objective  to  come  in 
contact  with  the  cover  glass. 

Do  not  separate  its  systems. 

-  Remove  dust  occasionally  from  the  front  and  rear 
surfaces  with  clean  camel's  hair  brush. 

After  using  an  oil  immersion  objective  invariably 
remove  the  fluid  with  a  soft  piece  of  linen. 

Never  at 'low  immersion  contact  with  cover  over 
ten  hours. 

Use  no  alcohol. 


The  various  features  which  must  be  considered  as 
determining  the  quality  of  an  objective  are : 

Angular  Aperture, 

Achromatism, 

Resolving  Power, 

Flatness  of  Field, 

Penetration, 

Working  Distance, 

Magnifying  Power. 

Although  these  attributes  may  be  considered  separ- 
ately, some  of  them  go  hand  in  hand.  The  presence 
or  extent  of  one  necessarily  involves  or  precludes 
another. 

Angular  Aperture.  The  angle  which  the  most 
extreme  rays  transmitted  through  the  objective  make 
at  the  point  of  focus  is  called  the  angular  aperture,  or, 

in  short,  the  angle  of  the 
objective,  the  extent  of  which 
is  expressed  in  degrees,  and 
of  all  the  qualities  in  an  ideal 
objective,  this  is  the  most 
important.  Thus  in  Fig.  34, 
d  is  considered  the  point  of 
focus,  and  c  d  e  the  angular 
aperture.  However,  the  above 
definition  has  its  limitations. 
Fig  34  While  in  objectives  of  proper 


\; 
V 

d 


70 


construction  it  holds  true,  there  are  many  in  which  it  is 
not  the  case.  For  instance,  an  objective  may  be  so 
constructed  that  it  may  transmit  a  considerable  number 
of  rays  ir>  excess  of  those  which  combine  to  form  an 
image  and  it  is  evident  that  as  they  do  not  aid  in  form- 
ing an  image,  they  serve  no  purpose  and  therefore 
have  no  value  in  the  consideration  of  angular  aperture. 
Objectives  of  the  same  power  are  made  of  varying 
degrees  of  angular  aperture,  while  others  differing  in 
power  may  have  the  same  angle. 


Diagrammatic  representation   of  light  transmitted  by  objectives  of  low  (a) 
and  high  (b)  angular  aperture. 

White  light  is  radiated  by  objects  equally  in  all 
directions,  but  only  those  rays  from  one-half  or  up  to 
1 80  degrees  of  the  object  need  be  considered.  It  is 
evident  that  the  more  rays  which  can  be  collected  to 
form  an  image,  the  more  distinct  will  it  become,  thus 
making  it  possible  to  see  more  detail.  If  of  two  objec- 


tives  one  receives  on  its  front  surface  and  transmits  a 
larger  number  of  rays  than  another  of  equal  magnify- 
ing power,  we  have  a  case  where  power  would  indicate 
that  we  should  see  equally  well,  but  we  will  find  that 
there  is  a  difference,  due  to  the  amount  of  angular 
aperture,  in  favor  of  the  wider  angle.  Or,  in  the  case 
of  two  objectives  in  which  one  has  one-half  the  power 
of  the  other,  but  which  transmits  the  same  amount  of 
rays,  it  would  appear  that  if  the  power  alone  were  to 
indicate  the  visibility  of  the  object,  the  higher  one 
should  show  more  detail,  whereas  in  reality  both  show 
equally  well.  The  practical  value  of  this  fact  is  most 
apparent  near  the  limit  of  the  resolving  power  of  micro- 
scope objectives. 

Aperture.  Without  the  defining  word  '  angular,' 
aperture  indicates  a  very  important  feature  in  an 
objective  and  designates  the  diameter  of  the  beam  or 
pencil  of  light  which  passes  out  through  the  rear  lens 
of  an  objective,  or  in  other  words,  is  the  effective 
diameter  of  the  rear  lens. 

The  word  *  aperture  '  has  been  used,  especially  in 
England,  to  designate  the  angular  aperture.  This  has 
created  confusion  and  if  an  abbreviation  be  used  the 
word  angle  is  far  more  suitable,  as  Dallinger  says  in 
Carpenter's,  "  The  Microscope  and  its  Revelations," 
"  We  would,  nevertheless,  remark  that  visibility  of  detail 
in,  for  example,  the  moon  depends  on  the  aperture  of 

72 


the  telescope ;  of  course  what  is  known  as  its  '  aperture  ' 
is  simply  estimated  by  the  diameter  of  the  object  glass. 
The  definition  of  *  aperture  '  in  its  legitimate  sense  of 
'  opening '  is  shown  by  Abbe  to  be  obtained  when  we 
compare  the  diameter  of  the  pencil  emergent  from  the 
objective  with  the  focal  length  of  that  objective." 

"  Thus  we  see  that,  just  as  in  the  telescope,  the 
absolute  diameter  of  the  object  glass  defines  the 
aperture,  so  in  the  microscope,  the  ratio  between  the 
utilized  diameter  of  the  back  lens  and  the  focal  length 
of  the  objective  defines  its  aperture.  This  definition  is 
clearly  a  definition  of  aperture  in  its  primary  and  only 
legitimate  meaning  of  an  opening,  that  is,  the  capacity 
of  the  objective  for  admitting  rays  from  the  object  and 
transmitting  them  to  the  image." 

"  Hence  '  aperture '  means  the  greater  or  less 
capacity  of  objectives  for  gathering  in  rays  from 
luminous  objects." 

Many  objectives  are  made  in  which  the  rear  lens 
is  larger  in  diameter  than  the  beam  of  rays  which, 
coining  from  an  object,  can  be  transmitted  through  it. 
This,  while  not  particularly  detrimental,  has  no  value 
and  perhaps  leads  to  a  wrong  conclusion  in  reference 
to  angular  aperture,  when  this  is  measured,  as  the 
excess  of  image  forming  rays,  called  stray  rays,  may 
indicate  a  greater  angle  and  resolving  power  than  the 
objective  really  possesses. 

73 


Cover  Glass.  At  this  point  we  must  introduce 
another  feature  which  has  not  yet  been  considered  but 
which  has  an  important  bearing  in  the  description  of 
angular  aperture.  As  has  been  shown,  in  describing 
the  principles  of  refraction,  rays  which  pass  from  air 
into  glass,  are  bent  out  of  their  course  or  refracted. 
The  cover  glass  is,  as  its  name  implies,  a  piece  of  glass 
to  cover  the  object ;  but  its  purpose  is  really  more  to 
protect  and  preserve  the  object,  or  with  soft  or  limpid 
objects  to  flatten  them  out,  and  to  obtain  by  means  of 
the  upper  surface  of  the  cover  an  optically  plane  sur- 
face. Although  extremely  thin,  it  has  a  very  pro- 
nounced influence  on  the  optical  performance  of  an 
objective  and  this  influence  increases  as  the  magnifying 
power  of  the  objective  increases. 

For  the  purpose  of  illustration,  we  will  imagine  a 
cover  glass  of  considerable  thickness,  Fig.  35,  in  which  o 

represents  the  source 
of  light,  or  in  this 
case  the  object.  As 
o  a  and  o  a'  enter  at 


d\b 


i    u 


b/  &/  the  lower  surface  of 


a', 


/  ,/  )     the  cover  glass  they 


XX     /  are  refracted  toward 

^ 


tne 

emerging  at  the  up- 

per   surface    of    the 

Fig.  35.  cover  glass  are  again 


74 


refracted  away  from  the  axis  in  the  directions  b  c 
and  b'  <?  ,  which  are  the  original  directions  of  the  rays. 
The  same  action  will  take  place  with  the  extreme  rays 
o  e  anfl  o  e'  ,  which  will  emerge  as  shown  at  d  f  and 
d'  f  .  If  the  front  lens  of  an  objective  is  brought 
close  to  the  cover  glass  we  can  study  its  influence  and 
for  this  purpose  will  use  the  simple  but  intelligible 
illustrations  of  Prof.  Gage,  Fig.  36. 

I  shows  a  dry  objective  in  which  the  intervening 
medium  between  the  top  of  the  cover  glass  and  the 
front  of  the  objective  is  air. 

II  is  a  water   immersion    objective  in   which  this 
space  is  filled  with  water. 

III  is  an  oil  or  homogeneous  immersion  objective 
in  which  the  space  is  filled  with  oil  of  cedar. 

From  what  has  been  said  in  regard  to  the  laws  of 
refraction  we  know  that  as  the  medium  becomes  more 
dense  the  refraction  becomes  greater  and  for  the  same 
reason  it  is  clear  that  as  the  difference  in  density 
between  the  two  media  becomes  less  the  refraction  is 
proportionately  less.  As  water  has  a  greater  density 
than  air,  but  less  than  glass,  refraction  between 
these  two  media  is  less  than  between  air  and  glass. 
As  the  oil  of  cedar  has  the  same  density  as  glass,  the 
oil  and  glass  are  virtually  a  homogeneous  mass  and 
no  refraction  between  these  two  media  takes  place. 

75 


I 

AIR. 


\      \\\ 


II 
WATER. 


Ill 


Ill 
OIL. 


Fig.  36. 


A 


L7     I 


zzx 


I/I 


Referring  now  to  the  diagrams  and  bearing  in  mind 
the  course  of  rays  from  an  object  through  a  cover 
glass,  we  can  follow  out  their  action.  In  the  case  of  a 
dry  objective,  we  see  that  a  portion  of  the  rays  coming 
from  the  top  of  the  cover  glass  are  so  refracted  that 
they  pass  outside  of  the  front  lens  of  the  objective  and 
are  therefore  lost.  In  the  water  immersion,  however, 
the  rays  are  less  refracted.  With  the  oil  immersion  the 
only  refraction  to  be  considered  is  that  which  takes 
place  at  the  lower  surface  of  the  cover  as  from  that 
point  the  rays  pass  without  change  of  direction 
through  the  cover,  fluid,  and  front  lens,  as  far  as  the 
convex  surface,  where  they  are  refracted  and  carried 
through  the  objective.  From  a  view  of  the  diagram  it 
might  appear  that  if  the  lens  were  enlarged  in  diameter 
more  of  the  extreme  rays  which  are  otherwise  lost 
might  be  utilized  ;  but  as  it  is  apparent  that  the  radius 
of  the  front  lens  must  then  be  increased,  we  know  that 
this  will  increase  the  focal  length  and  consequently 
reduce  the  magnifying  power. 

Numerical  Aperture.  The  consideration  of  the 
capacity  of  objectives  to  take  up  a  greater  or  less 
number  of  rays  diverging  from  a  given  object  leads 
to  the  question  as  to  whether  any  optical  law  may  exist 
in  relation  to  the  angular  aperture  of  objectives,  under 
the  different  conditions  of  their  use,  either  dry,  or 
with  water,  oil,  or  any  other  immersion  fluid,  and 
Prof.  Abbe  has  found  that  it  is  as  follows : 


77 


"  The  sine  of  one-half  of  the  angle  of  aperture  multi- 
plied by  the  refractive  index  of  the  medium  between  the 
front  of  the  objective  and  the  cover,  is  equal  to  the  effec- 
tive semi-diameter  of  the  emergent  pencil  at  the  point  of 
its  emergence  from  the  posterior  lens,  divided  by  the  equi- 
valent focal  length  of  the  objective"  This  expression 
Prof.  Abbe  calls  the  Numerical  Aperture  and  its  great 
value  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  serves  to  designate  the 
efficiency  of  an  objective  as  to  the  quantity  of  light  or 
number  of  rays,  essential  for  the  formation  of  a  perfect 
image,  that  can  be  utilized  by  it.  It  has  been  proven 
that  the  greater  the  value  of  the  Numerical  Aperture, 
the  more  perfect  is  the  delineation  of  fine  structure  in 
minute  objects  and  the  greater  is  the  degree  of  fineness 
of  detail  that  can  be  seen.  Also,  if  objectives  have  the 
same  Numerical  Aperture,  no  matter  what  their  focal 
lengths  and  the  intervening  media  may  be,  they  will 
give  equally  good  definition  of  fine  structure. 

When  designated  on  objective  mountings  or  used 
in  tables,  the  term  Numerical  Aperture  is  abbreviated 
to  N.  A.  The  formula  for  computing  Numerical 
Aperture  is  written,  N.A.=/z  sine  ur  where  n  is  the 
index  of  refraction  of  the  medium  between  front  lens 
and  cover  glass,  and  it  the  half-angle  of  aperture. 
Since  the  media  are  air,  water,  or  oil,  it  is  necessary  to 
know  the  refractive  index  of  each,  which  is  i.o  for  air. 
1.33  for  water,  about  1.52  for  oil,  and  for  the  regular 
crown  glass  is,  closely,  the  same  as  for  the  oil. 

78 


This  formula  can  be  better  illustrated  by  an  example. 
Take  an  objective  with  an  angle  of  aperture  in  air  of 
100  degrees,  of  which  the  numerical  aperture  is  to  be 
determhied.  The  focal  length  of  the  objective  is  left 
out  of  consideration  as  the  formula  depends  entirely  on 
angle  and  index  and  it  is  evident  that  all  objectives 
having  this  same  angle,  in  this  case  in  air,  will  have 
the  same  N.  A. 

Considering  the  angle  it,  it  wijl  be  readily  seen  that 
this  is  one-half  of  100  degrees,  or  50  degrees.  Now 
referring  to  a  table  of  natural  sines  or  to  a  table  of 
logarithms  it  will  be  found  that  sine  //,  or  the  sine  of 
50  degrees  is  equal  to  0.766,  and  as  the  intervening 
medium  is  air,  the  value  of  index  n  is  equal  to  i.o. 

Substituting  the  above  values  in  the  formula,  we 
have  N.A.=(/z  or  i.o)  x  (sine  u  or  o.766)=o.766. 

To  make  this  computation  we  have  always  the  value 
of  the  index  of  refraction  at  hand,  but  the  angular 
aperture  must  be  determined,  and  the  method  for 
accomplishing  this  will  be  given  in  a  succeeding 
chapter. 

As  a  rule  the  designation  as  to  power  and  numerical 
aperture  engraved  on  the  mounting  of  an  objective 
from  a  responsible  firm  can  be  relied  upon  as  being 
quite  close,  the  variations  seldom  being  greater  than  is 
incident  to  accurate  human  handiwork,  and  such 
variations  as  do  occur  have  little  influence  on  the 


79 


optical  capacity.  It  is  manifestly  difficult  for  opticians 
who  produce  large  quantities  of  objectives  to  measure 
and  suitably  mark  each  individual  product,  particularly 
when  the  differences  are  at  best  slight. 

It  is  easy  to  learn  the  numerical  aperture  of  an 
objective  after  the  angular  aperture  has  been  deter- 
mined, as  the  various  values  for  different  angles  have 
been  computed  and  are  issued  in  tables.  Such  tables 
can  be  found  in  the  pages  of  the  Journal  of  the  Royal 
Microscopical  Society  and  in  the  latest  edition  of 
Carpenter's  "  The  Microscope  and  its  Revelations," 

Before  the  numerical  aperture  was  accepted  as  the 
absolute  measure  of  the  optical  efficiency  of  an  objec- 
tive, it  was  known  that  an  increase  of  angular  aperture 
gave  better  results,  but  just  why  this  was  so,  was  not 
appreciated.  So  also  was  it  difficult  to  understand  that 
a  dry  objective  of  180  degrees,  a  water  immersion  of 
96  degrees,  and  an  oil  immersion  of  82  degrees  angular 
aperture  had  the  same  optical  efficiency. 

How  to  Measure  Angular  Aperture.  With 
instruments  in  which  the  axis  of  the  mirror-bar  is  in  the 
plane  of  the  stage  and  in  which  the  circular  part  is 
graduated,  the  matter  of  measuring  angular  aperture  is 
quite  simple.  It  was  recommended  by  Mr.  Tolles,  and 
has  been  carefully  worked  out  by  Dr.  George  E. 
Blackham.  After  the  object  has  been  focused  upon, 
incline  the  body  of  the  microscope  to  a  horizontal 

80 


position,  remove  the  mirror  with  its  bow  from  the 
socket  and  place  therein,  or  by  rubber  band  attach 
to  the  end  of  the  bar,  a  toy  candle  at  such  height 
that  the  flame  will  be  in  the  optical  axis.  The 
mirror-bar  is  now  swung  to  the  right  and  left  to 
such  an  extent  that  one-half  the  field  shall  be 
illuminated,  provided  the  object  shall  still  be  well 
defined,  or  to  the  point  where  the  definition  of  the 
object  shall  appear  impaired  without  regard  to  the 
illumination  of  the  field.  These  limits  will  mark  the 
efficient  beam  of  light  which  passes  through  the  rear 
system  of  the  objective.  In  some  objectives  the  rear 
system  is  larger  in  diameter  than  the  effective  beam  of 
light  transmitted  from  the  object,  which  will  permit 
stray  rays  to  reach  the  eyepiece,  but  which  have  no 
value  in  forming  the  image  and  therefore  are  not  to  be 
considered.  In  instruments  which  have  no  graduated 
mirror-bar  the  matter  becomes  more  difficult  and  less 
accurate. 

Another  method  is  that  of  Lister.  After  the  object 
has  been  focused  upon,  place  the  body  of  the  micro- 
scope in  a  horizontal  position  and  in  front  and  some 
distance  from  it,  a  candle  or  lamp ;  if  the  latter,  with 
the  narrow  edge  of  the  wick  toward  the  instrument,  but 
level  with  the  tube.  Move  the  lamp  on  each  side  of 
the  axis  to  a  point  as  described  in  the  foregoing 
method.  Indicate  the  position  of  the  center  of  the 
lamp  at  each  extreme  on  the  table  and  beneath  the 

81 


instrument  also  a  point  situated  vertically  under  the 
object.  Connect  these  points  and  with  a  protractor 
measure  the  angle. 

A  very  accurate  method  and  one  which  can  be 
carried  out  on  all  instruments  is  that  suggested  by 
Prof.  Abbe  and  for  which  the  firm  of  Carl  Zeiss  supply 
an  apparatus  which  is  called  the  apertometer,  which 
consists  of  a  semi-circular  disk  of  glass  having  at  its 
straight  edge  a  beveled  surface  which  reflects  the  light 
through  a  perforated  disk  into  the  objective.  Two 
strips  of  brass  which  act  as  stops  are  placed  on  the  arc 
and  thus  indicate  the  limit  of  aperture,  which,  as  well 
as  the  corresponding  numerical  aperture,  can  be  read 
off  on  the  scale. 

In  the  foregoing  we  have  gone  to  some  length  in 
stating  the  importance  of  angular  and  numerical  aper- 
ture and  laid  stress  upon  the  influence  which  these 
factors  have  upon  the  efficiency  of  the  objective.  We 
shall  now  endeavor  to  explain  what  these  attributes  are 
which  determine  the  value  of  an  objective. 

Resolving  Power.  Most  important  of  all  qualities 
in  an  objective  is  the  resolving  power,  which  is  the 
power  to  show  intricate  structure  and  minute  detail,  it 
being  of  course  understood  that  the  objective  is  properly 
constructed  so  that  defects  shall  not  detract  from  this 
quality.  It  is  of  course  clear,  that  no  matter  how  great 
the  numerical  aperture  may  be,  its  effectiveness  may 

82 


be  injured  by  the  presence  of  chromatic  or  spherical 
aberration  or  defective  mechanical  work,  and  it  is  a 
matter  of  no  uncommon  occurrence  that  in  objectives 
of  the  same  power  and  aperture  there  is  a  noticeable 
difference  in  resolving  power;  or  in  objectives  of 
different  numerical  aperture,  the  one  of  less  aperture 
will  have  a  greater  resolving  power  than  the  other. 
If  we  could  accept  the  statements  of  makers  as  true 
ones,  a  portion  of  this  work  and  a  vast  amount  of 
literature  would  be  unnecessary,  but  the  writer  has 
occasion  to  know  that  this  is  not  the  case  and  that 
there  is  a  constantly  increasing  danger  and  tendency 
to  allow  small  defects  to  pass,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that 
the  general  efficiency  of  the  microscope  has  increased 
in  late  years. 

To  resolve  a  structure  is  to  make  it  visible  and  the 
resolving  power  is  in  direct  ratio  to  the  numerical 
aperture  and  can  be  mathematically  calculated.  It  can 
be  studied  from  the  aperture  tables  already  mentioned. 
It  will  be  seen  that  an  objective  with  a  numerical 
aperture  of  0.50  will  make  visible  only  one-half  as 
many  lines  in  the  same  space  as  one  with  a  numerical 
aperture  of  i.o.  This,  it  will  be  seen,  refers  only  to 
the  resolving  power  of  an  objective  and  makes  abso- 
lutely no  reference  to  its  magnifying  power.  Now,  as 
we  know  that  the  purpose  of  the  compound  microscope 
is  to  give  magnifying  power  and  that  there  is  a  certain 
structure  which  is  not  visible  to  the  eye,  how  can  we 

83 


reconcile  this  with  the  fact  that  numerical  aperture  only 
does  it  ?  Why,  if  this  is  true,  should  we  use  a  higher 
power  objective  with  a  prescribed  aperture  in  pre- 
ference to  a  lower  one  of  the  same  aperture  ? 

The  normal  eye  can  see  about  200  lines  to  the  inch, 
or  structures  which  are  1-200  of  an  inch  apart  and  it  is 
therefore  evident  that  any  structures  under  the  micro- 
scope must  be  separated  at  least  to  this  extent  in  the 
virtual  image,  in  order  that  they  may  become  visible. 
While  we  have  shown  that  magnifying  power  may  be 
increased 

by  increasing  the  power  of  the  objective, 
by  increasing  the  power  of  the  eyepiece, 
by  increasing  the  tube  length, 

we  are  limited  in  the  last  direction  mainly  by  such 
length  of  tube  as  has  been  found  convenient  in  the 
construction  of  the  stand ;  in  the  case  of  eyepiece  on 
the  one  hand  by  convenience  in  use  and  on  the  other 
by  the  fact  that  too  great  an  increase  causes  an  indis- 
tinctness, so  that,  although  variation  in  eyepiece  within 
narrow  limits  is  admissible,  we  are  compelled  to  select 
an  objective  which,  with  a  medium  power  eyepiece, 
will  give  sufficient  separation  to  structure  and  fine 
detail,  that  it  will  be  visible  to  the  eye  without  any 
undue  strain. 

84 


Chromatic  Aberration.  Up  to  this  point  we 
have  spoken  of  the  correction  of  chromatic  aberration  by 
suitable  use  of  flint  glass  lenses  and  for  the  purpose  of 
not  making  the  subject  too  complex,  have  purposely 
refrained  from  stating  that  entire  freedom  from  color 
is  impossible  in  the  ordinary  combinations  of  flint  and 
crown  glass.  The  correction  is  for  only  two  colors  of 
the  spectrum,  red  and  violet,  leaving  as  a  residue 
the  other  colors  which  appear  as  apple  green  and 
purple.  These  form  the  so-called  secondary  spectrum 
and  on  bright  objects  this  can  easily  be  discerned. 
For  all  ordinary  purposes  the  presence  of  these  colors 
is  not  prejudicial  to  the  performance  of  an  objective. 
The  secondary  spectrum  becomes  more  pronounced  in 
dry  objectives  of  large  aperture  and  when  high  power 
eyepieces  are  used.  Even  in  properly  corrected  low  and 
medium  powers  of  medium  aperture  and  high  power 
immersion  objectives  it  is  noticeable,  but  certainly 
not  to  any  extent  to  be  objectionable,  except  when 
oblique  light  is  used,  provided  of  course  that  the  other 
corrections  are  properly  made. 

Great  care  should  be  used  in  judging  an  objective 
by  its  chromatic  correction  and  one  should  not  be  led 
to  false  conclusions  by  the  amount  of  color  which  an 
objective  shows.  It  has  been  a  common  experience 
with  the  writer  to  have  objectives  complained  of  which 
were  properly  corrected  and  which  were  excellent  in 
every  respect  except  that  they  showed  the  secondary 

85 


colors,  so  that  it  may  safely  be  said,  remembering  that 
wide  aperture  involves  a  greater  amount  of  color,  that 
an  objective  showing  the  proper  colors  of  green  and 
purple  and  having  proper  resolving  power  may  safely 
be  accepted,  or  in  the  choice  of  objectives  between  one 
showing  no  color  but  having  no  resolving  power,  the 
other  having  color  and  resolving  power,  the  latter  is 
certainly  the  preferable  one. 

When  colors  of  green  and  purple  are  not  sufficiently 
pronounced  on  an  object  when  the  mirror  is  in  central 
position,  they  will  become  more  apparent  when  the 
mirror  is  swung  to  an  oblique  position,  using  any  object 
suitable  to  the  power  of  the  objective,  and  preferably 
mounted  dry. 

If  the  mirror  is  swung  to  the  left,  the  object  should 
be  fringed  on  the  right  side  with  yellow-green  and  on 
the  left  with  bluish  color,  or  if  the  mirror  is  swung 
to  the  right  the  conditions  are  reversed. 

When  the  objective  is  not  properly  corrected  it  is 
said  to  be  chromatically  under-corrected  or  over-corrected. 

It  is  well  to  state  here,  however,  that,  with  the  care 
which  is  exercised  by  reputable  makers,  objectives 
which  deviate  from  the  proper  point  of  correction,  or  in 
which  the  under-  or  over-correction  is  so  prominent 
as  to  be  noticeable  to  one  inexperienced  in  this  work, 
are  never  allowed  to  reach  the  public.  These  remarks 
are  not  intended  to  discourage  the  student  from  testing 

86 


objectives  for  color  correction ;  on  the  contrary  we 
particularly  recommend  such  tests  as  will  tend  to 
more  critical  judgment  of  the  optical  properties  of 
the  instrument  and  work  in  general.  To  aid  those 
who  have  not  had  sufficiently  long  experience  to  reach 
correct  conclusions,  methods  for  judging  color  correc- 
tion are  given  which  should  be  applied  to  doubtful  pro- 
ducts ;  but  the  experiments  should  be  repeated  quite 
often  before  reaching  a  conclusion. 

To  judge  under-correction  by  central  light,  focus 
upon  a  coarse  object  and  it  will  be  found  to  have  a 
distinctly  bluish  tinge.  If  not  pronounced,  by  slightly 
increasing  the  distance  between  objective  and  object, 
the  latter  will  show  a  blue  color  and  by  decreasing 
the  distance  an  orange  color. 

To  judge  over-correction,  after  focusing  on  the 
object,  this  will  show  an  orange  color,  or  by  increas- 
ing the  distance  between  objective  and  object  the  orange 
will  appear,  and  by  decreasing  the  distance,  the  blue. 

To  judge  color  correction  by  oblique  light:  Under- 
correction  will  show  when  the  mirror  is  swung  to  the 
left  and  the  object  is  fringed  with  orange  on  the  left 
and  bluish  on  the  right. 

Over-correction  is  apparent  when  the  object  is 
fringed  with  blue  on  the  left  and  orange  on  the  right. 

Another  method  is  that  recommended  by  Naegeli  and 
Schwendener  in  their  work  an  the  microscope.  The 

87 


right  half  at  the  front  or  back  of  the  objective  is 
covered  with  black  paper  or  tinfoil  so  that  only  the 
other  or  left  half  remains  optically  effective ;  take  for  an 
object  a  line  or  dot  of  light  which  can  be  easily  pro- 
duced by  blackening  one  surface  of  a  slide  by  smoking 
in  an  oil  flame  and  drawing  a  line  across  it  with  a  point. 

Under-correction  shows  when  the  image  has  on 
the  right  side  a  violet  or  blue  border  and  on  the  left 
a  red  or  orange  colored  border. 

Over-correction  shows  on  the  other  hand  when  the 
left  side  appears  violet  or  blue  and  the  right  red  or 
orange. 

Spherical  Aberration  and  Cover  Glass.     As 

has  been  stated,  there  is  a  residue  of  chromatic  and 
spherical  aberration  in  all  ordinary  achromatic  lenses 
and  objectives.  The  use  of  cover  glass  influences  the 
spherical  correction  and  while  not  appreciable  to  any 
extent  in  low  powers,  it  is  very  sensible  in  the  medium 
and  high  powers.  Referring  to  Fig.  37  it  will  be 
remembered  that  the  rays  from  the  object  do  not 
reach  the  surface  of  the  objective  front  uninterruptedly 
but  are  changed  in  their  course.  If  we  make  use  of 
the  same  illustration  and  extend  the  refracted  rays 
downward  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines  d  e,  f  c,  f  c, 
d'  e  until  they  meet  at  the  axis,  these  points  will  be  the 
apparent  location  of  the  object  and  will  appear  to  meet 
in  the  planes  e  a  and  c  b  instead  of  at  o.  To  neutralize 


this  condition  the  objective  will  require  to  be  spher- 
ically under-corrected,  by  which  is  understood  that  the 
marginal  rays  will  eminate  from  a  point  near  the  objec- 
tive and  the  central  rays  at  a  greater  distance  from  the 


r/d/ 

1      fi 

\ 

/  , 

A         \ 

Fig.   37. 

objective,  or  as  is  shown  in  the  diagram,  appear  to 
come  from  exactly  the  same  points,  which  are  the 
apparent  positions  of  the  object  or  g  e,h  c,h'  c,  and  gf  e. 
If  a  thicker  cover  is  used  the  objective  will  require 
to  be  more  under-corrected,  or  if  a  thinner  one,  less 
under-correction  is  needed,  so  that  if  an  objective  is 
corrected  for  a  definite  thickness  of  cover,  its  correction 
will  be  disturbed  if  greater  or  less  thickness  be  used, 


and  since  resolving  power  depends  primarily  upon  the 
proper  correction  of  the  two  aberrations,  it  will  be 
entirely  lost  if  there  is  much  variation  from  the  normal 
thickness. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  in  microscopical  work 
we  are  dealing  with  minute  things  and  this  applies 
especially  to  the  cover  glass.  By  studying  the  table 
which  follows  it  will  be  noted  that  there  is  quite  a 
difference  in  thickness  used  by  the  various  makers,  and 
that  the  mean  thickness  is  0.18  mm.  or  0.007  inch. 

The  deviation  from  standard  thickness  affects  the 
distinctness  of  the  image  according  to  its  structure  and 
in  proportion  to  the  increase  in  power.  In  the  low 
powers  there  is  no  noticeable  influence,  but  with  the 
1-5,  1-6,  and  1-8  it  is  so  marked  that  with  objects  of 
fine  structure. a  deviation  of  0.05  mm.  either  thicker 
or  thinner  than  the  standard  is  sufficient  to  totally 
obliterate  fine  structure  and  have  the  outlines  and 
coarse  lines  only  apparent.  Slighter  variations  affect 
the  image  proportionately. 

It  is  surprising  to  see  how  little  attention  is  paid  to 
this  subject  in  the  large  majority  of  the  standard  works 
on  the  microscope.  Almost  all  books  give  carefully 
prepared  illustrations  and  descriptions  showing  the 
effect  on  the  course  of  light  of  the  interposition  of  the 
cover  glass,  and  after  giving  conclusive  evidence  of  its 
disturbing  influence,  still,  in  a  general  way,  say  it  is  of 
little  moment. 


9° 


It  is  a  misfortune  that  cover  glasses  are  not  of  uni- 
form thickness,  but  the  difficulties  of  producing  them 
of  equal  thickness  are  almost  unsurmountable,  and  it  is 
also  to»  be  deplored  that  opticians  have  not  agreed 
upon  a  standard  thickness  for  which  they  correct  their 
objectives.  The  list  herewith  given,  which  has  been 
prepared  by  Prof.  Gage,  will  show  the  variations  in 
thickness  used  by  different  opticians  as  standard. 


r 


mm. 


T2o°o  mm. 

TITO  mm. 

iVo  mm. 

nro-iV'o  mm. 

T¥o-T2o°o  mm. 

ToViTrV  mm. 

rV'o  mm. 

To2o-i¥o  mm. 

ToVrVo  mm. 

i1.-)0,,-  mm. 


J.  Green, 

J.  Grunow, 

Powell  &  Lealand, 

Spencer  Lens  Co., 

W.  Wales, 

Watson  &  Sons, 

Klonne  &  Muller, 

Bausch  &  Lomb  Optical  Co., 

E.  Leitz, 

R.  Winkel, 

Ross  &  Co., 

C.  Zeiss, 

C.  Reichert, 

Gundlach  Optical  Co., 

VV.  &  H.  Seibert, 

R.  &  J.  Beck, 

J.  Zentmayer, 

Nachet  et  Fils, 

Bezu,  Hausser  et  Cie., 

Swift  &  Son. 


91 


The  cover  glass  may  truly  be  called  a  necessary 
evil ;  for,  while  absolutely  required  in  microscopical 
investigations,  there  is  no  adjunct  to  the  microscope 
that  has  been  and  is  productive  of  so  much  evil,  and 
has  done  so  much  to  retard  the  utilization  of  benefits 
made  possible  by  the  advance  in  the  construction  of 
objectives. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  majority  of  objec- 
tives will  always  be  dry,  and  it  is  an  unfortunate 
circumstance  that  with  this  class  of  objectives  the 
influence  of  variation  in  thickness  of  cover  glasses  is 
most  apparent;  but-  since  it  is  so,  all  possible  aid 
should  be  given  to  enable  the  student  to  obtain  results 
which  closely  equal  those  obtained  with  the  conditions 
under  which  the  objectives  were  originally  corrected. 

With  oil  immersion  objectives  a  variation  in  thick- 
ness is  not  very  appreciable,  provided,  however,  that 
the  fluid  is  of  the  proper  consistency,  as  there  is  pract- 
ically no  refraction  between  the  cover  glass,  immersion 
fluid  and  front  lens  of  objective.  If  the  fluid,  however, 
does  not  have  the  same  refraction  as  the  cover  the 
sperical  aberration  may  be  as  pronounced  as  with  dry 
objectives,  as  it  becomes  more  noticeable  on  account  of 
higher  power.  It  is  therefore  important  to  purchase 
the  fluid  from  the  maker  of  the  objective  or  under  a 
guarantee  of  the  index  of  refraction. 

Objectives  with  fixed  mountings,  such  as  are  ordi- 
narily  used,  in  which  the  lenses  have  fixed  relations 

92 


correcting  the  spherical  aberration  for  a  definite  thick- 
ness of  cover  glass,  will  not  permit  of  any  change  to 
correct  for  other  thicknesses.  With  these,  correction 
can  be*  made  within  narrow  limits  by  varying  the  tube 
length. 

For  a  thick  cover  the  tube  must  be  contracted ; 
for  a  thin  cover  the  tube  must  be  extended. 

Objectives  are,  however,  also  constructed  with  a 
mechanical  arrangement  by  which  the  distances  between 
the  lenses  may  be  varied  and  are  then  called  adjustable. 

For    thick    covers    the   lenses   are    brought  together, 
or  the  adjustment  is  closed. 

For  thin  covers  the  lenses  are  separated,  or  the 
adjustment  is  opened. 

In  order  therefore  to  obtain  the  highest  efficiency 
of  an  objective,  a  cover  glass  should  be  used  which  has 
the  same  thickness  as  the  standard  used  by  the  maker 
of  the  objective.  Covers  of  standard  thickness  may  be 
purchased,  but  the  cost  will  be  considerably  higher 
than  for  the  thicknesses  regularly  listed. 

The  best  plan  is  to  purchase  a  cover  glass  guage 
by  means  of  which  the  thickness  may  be  accurately 
measured.  Under  this  plan  we  recommend  the  follow- 
ing procedure : 

Select  standard  thickness  and  use  with  high  and 
medium  power  dry  objectives.  Thicker  covers  use 

93 


with  low  power  objectives ;  thinner  covers  use  with 
oil  immersion  objectives,  as  increased  working  distance 
is  obtained. 

Penetration.  Penetrating  power  is  the  quality 
which  enables  us  to  look  into  an  object — to  observe 
different  planes  at  one  time.  It  depends  upon  magni- 
fying power  and  angular  aperture,  and  decreases  with 
the  increase  of  either  of  these  properties.  Objectives 
are  generally  not  constructed  with  any  reference  to  it ; 
it  is,  rather,  a  natural  consequence  of  certain  qualities 
of  the  objectives. 

Penetration  and  resolving  power  are  antagonistic,  or 
at  any  rate  in  an  inverse  ratio,  and  can  only  be  com- 
bined in  a  definite  proportion.  In  two  objectives  of 
the  same  power  and  aperture,  one  cannot  have  penetra- 
tion as  a  special  feature  and  the  other  resolving  power ; 
they  will  be  similar  in  these  qualities  provided  they  are 
similarly  corrected.  However,  if  they  are  not  similar 
in  their  angular  aperture,  the  one  of  smaller  aperture 
will  have  more  penetration  than  the  other.  In  objec- 
tives of  the  same  angle  but  different  power,  the  one 
of  low  power  will  have  in  itself  more  penetration. 

Low  power  objectives  have  a  proportionately  greater 
penetrating  power  than  medium  or  high  powers.  In 
an  object  of  considerable  thickness,  different  planes 
can  be  observed  at  one  time  without  focusing  on  them 
and  we  thus  obtain  an  appreciation  of  form  which  is 


94 


impossible    in    the    higher    powers,    as    in  these,  focal 
adjustment  for  different  depths  is  required. 

Furthermore  the  accommodation  of  the  eye  is  also 
a  factor  as  it  varies  with  different  persons  and  thus,  to 
a  certain  extent,  is  a  matter  of  individuality. 

Flatness  of  Field.  The  field  of  view  or  in 
brief  the  field  in  a  microscope  is  the  area  which  is 
observed  by  looking  into  the  eyepiece.  While  its  area 
is  constant  in  an  eyepiece,  the  size  of  the  area  being 
determined  by  the  diameter  of  the  diaphragm,  it  is 
variable  with  the  change  of  objectives,  the  field  or 
visible  portion  of  the  object  becoming  smaller  with  the 
increase  in  power.  Angular  aperture  has  no  influence 
on  the  size  of  field.  The  field  is  said  to  be  flat  when 
all  the  parts  of  the  image  within  its  area  are  sharp  at 
the  same  time. 

When  not  fiat,  it  will  be  found  that  as  the  edge 
of  the  field  is  approached  the  image  becomes  more  and 
more  indistinct,  and  that  the  objective  must  be  corre- 
spondingly adjusted  ;  in  many  cases  it  remains  indis- 
tinct or  blurred,  and  this  may  be  considered  a  most 
serious  fault.  Lack  of  flatness  may  be  due  to  the 
un evenness  of  the  object,  and  in  order  to  test  the 
objective  for  flatness,  an  object  of  assured  flatness 
should  be  used,  such  as  a  stage  micrometer  which  con- 
sists of  a  series  of  very  fine  parallel  lines  cut  into 
glass  and  very  accurately  spaced  according  to  definite 

95 


fractions  of  millimeters  or  inches.  After  focusing  upon 
the  lines,  they  will  appear  to  become  more  curved  and 
less  distinct  as  they  near  the  edge,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  38. 

Flatness  of  field  mainly  depends  upon  the  correction 
of  the  spherical  aberration  and,  as  under  the  best 
conditions  this  cannot  be  entirely 
eliminated,  it  is  impossible  to 
obtain  absolute  flatness.  It  may 
also,  however,  be  due  to  a  faulty 
eyepiece ;  in  this  case  it  can 
be  determined  by  observing 
whether  it  shows  equally  in 
different  objectives.  With  be- 
ginners, especially,  it  is  usually 
most  complained  of,  owing  probably  to  the  fact  that 
it  is  most  easily  discernable.  While  it  is  a  desirable 
quality  and  indicates  to  a  considerable  degree  the 
quality  of  objectives,  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  absolute 
flatness  of  field  in  objectives  of  sufficient  angular 
aperture  to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  present  day 
and  especially  in  higher  powers. 

Working  Distance  represents  the  free  space 
between  the  front  lens  in  the  objective  and  the  upper 
surface  of  the  cover  glass  which  protects  the  object, 
when  the  objective  is  in  focus  and  is  corrected  for  that 
cover  glass. 


38. 


96 


In  objectives  of  low  power,  it  is  of  little  considera- 
tion, but  with  those  of  medium  and  high  power,  where 
it  must  be  expressed  in  o.oi  or  o.ooi  inch,  it  becomes 
a  matter,  of  importance. 

Working  distance  is  spoken  of  as  being  long  or 
short  and  varies  with  the  power  and  angular  aperture. 
Generally  the  working  distance  decreases  with  the 
increase  in  numerical  aperture  and  becomes  greater  as 
the  aperture  becomes  smaller.  It  was  for  a  long  time 
considered  that  these  two  qualities  varied  according  to 
a  fixed  rule,  but  this  at  the  present  time  is  not  con- 
sidered to  be  the  case.  While  in  objectives  of  the 
same  aperture  it  may  vary  considerably,  in  others  of 
different  aperture  the  higher  one  may  have  the  greater 
wrorking  distance.  The  skill  of  the  optician  must,  to 
a  considerable  degree,  determine  the  amount  of  it. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  that  working  distance 
stands  in  no  direct  relation  to  the  focal  distance  of  the 
objective  and  it  may  be  added  that  it  is  never  as 
great  as  the  focal  distance  of  a  simple  lens  of  the  same 
magnifying  power. 

As  may  be  imagined,  there  is  a  variety  of  opinions 
as  to  what  constitutes  long  or  short  working  distance  in 
a  certain  objective.  No  definite  rule  can  be  laid  down 
for  this,  as  it  is  conditioned  on  the  skill  and  require- 
ments of  the  manipulator.  It  has  several  times  occurred 
in  the  experience  of  the  writer  that  objectives  were 

97 


complained  of  as  having  no  working  distance  (that  the 
objective  could  not  be  focused)  when  on  investigation 
it  was  found  that  very  thick  glass  had  been  used  as 
cover  glass. 

There  is  no  question  about  the  desirability  of  a  long 
working  distance  in  the  higher  power  objectives,  as  the 
comfort  of  working  is  greatly  increased  and  the  danger 
of  injury  to  the  objective  and  also  the  object  which 
may  sometimes  be  a  rare  specimen  is  further  removed ; 
but,  unfortunately,  the  difficulty  cannot  be  eliminated 
and  must  be  reckoned  with.  It  is  therefore  important 
for  the  student  to  know  the  amount  of  wrorking  distance, 
so  as  to  make  allowance  for  it  in  focusing  the  objective, 
and  to  know  the  limit  of  thickness  to  use  with  high 
power  objectives. 

The  actual  measurement  of  wwking  distance  in 
microscopes  having  a  graduated  micrometer  screw  is 
simple  and  may  be  determined  as  follows : 

Lower  the  eyes  to  the  level  of  the  stage  and  bring 
the  front  of  the  objective  very  carefully  just  in  contact 
with  the  top  of  the  cover  glass.  Note  the  division  on 
micrometer  screw  and  by  an  upward  focusing  turn  of 
the  screw  bring  the  object  in  focus  a/id  read  off  the 
distance  traversed. 

With  an  oil  immersion  objective  follow  the  same 
process  by  bringing  the  objective  in  contact  with  the 


carer  glass  while  dry,  then  separate  slightly  and,  inclin- 
ing the  instrument,  allow  some  of  the  oil  to  drop  in  the 
space,  then  focus  and  read  off.  Divide  the  number  of 
graduations  on  the  screw  head  by  the  pitch  of  the  screw 
and  multiply  by  the  number  of  divisio?is  read  off. 

Magnifying  Power.  This  is  a  question  of  vital 
importance  in  a  microscope,  not  so  much  as  a  quality 
in  itself,  as  in  connection  with  the  resolving  power. 
The  inquiry  should  not  be  simply,  how  many  diameters 
an  instrument  will  magnify,  but  what  the  precision  and 
extent  of  its  definition  is  under  a  certain  magnifying 


2-3  inch  Objective.  1-6  inch  Objective.        1-12  inch  Oil  Immersion 

Objective. 

power.  If  a"  high  magnifying  power  is  all  that  is 
desired,  this  may  be  obtained  to  an  almost  unlimited 
extent  by  means  of  simple  lenses  which  may  be  pro- 


99 


cured  at  a  small  pecuniary  outlay ;  but  these  do  not 
give  a  distinct  image  nor  do  they  make  structure  visible, 
which,  be  it  remembered,  it  is  the  purpose  of  the  micro- 
scope to  do. 

The  normal  eye  can  distinguish  about  200  lines  to 
the  inch  and  in  a  microscope  such  magnifying  power 
should  be  used  as  will  apparently  separate  the  structure 
which  it  is  sought  to  see  at  least  to  this  extent.  To 
illustrate,  take  a  1-6  inch  objective  of  0.85  N.  A.  and  a 
2  inch  eyepiece.  An  objective  of  this  kind,  properly 
corrected,  resolves  the  test-object  Pleurosigma  angula- 
tum,  in  which  the  lines  average  60,000  to  the  inch. 
With  the  above  eyepiece  it  is  utterly  impossible  to  see 
them,  while  if  it  is  replaced  by  a  3-4  inch  or  1-2  inch 
eyepiece,  they  can  easily  be  distinguished.  This  is 
not  owing  to  any  peculiar  quality  of  the  eyepiece,  but 
merely  to  the  fact  that  by  increasing  the  magnifying 
power  the  dimensions  of  the  object  have  been  increased 
and  the  spaces  between  the  lines  have  been  separated 
sufficiently  to  become  visible  to  the  eye. 

Beginners  as  a  rule  are  apt  to  use  too  much  magni- 
fication, or  amplification,  and  often  attempt  to  view  a 
large  surface  with  an  objective  which  will  show  but  a 
small  part  of  it.  It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the 
apparent  field  of  view  is  decreased  as  higher  powers 
are  used  and  that  a  low  power  will  give  a  better 
impression  of  a  large,  coarse  object  and  its  relative 
parts,  because  it  makes  a  larger  surface  visible. 

100 


Objectives  of  the  same  power,  but  having  different 
angular  apertures,  will  always  have  the  same  magni- 
fying power  and  field. 

The  fellowing  table  will  probably  be  of  assistance 
to  the  beginner.  After  he  has  become  better  acquainted 
with  his  instrument  his  judgment  will  dictate  to  him 
what  to  do. 

A  power  of  25  diameters  will  show  a  surface  of 
about  1-5  inch  diameter. 

A  power  of  50  diameters  will  show  a  surface  of 
about  i-io  inch  diameter. 

A  power  of  100  diameters  will  show  a  surface  of 
about  1-20  inch  diameter. 

A  power  of  joo  diameters  will  show  a  surface  oj 
about  i-ioo  inch  diameter. 

A  power  of  1000  diameters  will  show  a  surface  of 
about  i -200  inch  diameter. 

This  table  is  approximately  correct  with  a  Huy- 
ghenian  eyepiece. 

As  has  already  been  shown,  magnifying  power  may 
be  obtained  by  using  a  higher  power  objective,  or  eye- 
piece, or  lengthening  the  tube,  and  it  has  also  been 
pointed  out  that  the  objective  should  be  relied  upon  to 
obtain  this  increase. 

Objectives  with  the  same  angular  aperture,  but  of 
different  power,  will  have  the  same  resolving  power. 


In  both  objectives  and  eyepieces  the  lenses  decrease 
in  size  with  the  increase  in  power  and  consequently 
gather  less  light  and  while  this  one  objection  exists  in 
the  objective,  an  additional  one  occurs  in  the  eyepiece, 
in  that  the  eye  must  be  brought  closer  to  the  eye-lens 
and  must  be  kept  more  strictly  in  the  optical  axis, 
which  at  a  long  sitting,  becomes  fatiguing. 

Choice  of  eyepiece  should  be  determined  by  require- 
ments and  individual  preference,  but  the  use  of  high 
power  eyepieces  should  be  avoided  whenever  possible. 
All  responsible  makers  of  microscopes  make  up  such 
outfits  of  stands,  objectives,  and  eyepieces  as  experience 
has  taught  are  most  efficient  and  convenient. 

In  all  work  on  recognized  forms  (objects  of  which 
the  structure  is  known)  it  is  safe  to  follow  the  rule,  not 
to  use  a  higher  power  than  is  necessary  to  properly 
study  them. 

Apochromatic  Objectives.  All  achromatic 
objectives  have  a  residual  chromatic  and  spherical 
aberration,  the  former  being  the  secondary  spectrum  : 
but  Prof.  Abbe  has  in  this  direction  also  effected  a  not- 
able improvement,  which  with  a  uniform  correction  of 
the  spherical  aberration  corrects  for  three  colors,  thus 
resulting  in  a  closer  concentration  of  image-forming 
rays  which  with  the  greater  numerical  aperture  made 
possible  by  these  conditions  results  in  a  higher  resolv- 
ing power.  It  has  been  found,  however,  that,  in  high 


powers  of  wide  aperture,  even  with  these  objectives 
there  is  an  outstanding  error  which  by  itself  cannot  be 
corrected.  This  is  balanced  in  the  eyepiece,  which  is 
correspondingly  over-corrected,  and  is  called  the  com- 
pensating eyepiece.  It  has  therefore  been  necessary  to 
make  the  low  powers  under-corrected  as  well,  so  that 
they  may  be  used  with  the  same  eyepieces,  for  it  is 
evident  that  neither  these  objectives  with  the  Huy- 
ghenian  eyepiece,  nor  the  compensating  eyepiece  with 
the  achromatic  objectives  will  give  satisfactory  results. 

The  proper  combination  of  apochromatic  objective 
and  compensating'  eyepiece  gives  a  beautiful  image 
with  the  maximum  of  resolving  power,  unapproached 
by  any  of  the  achromatic  combinations.  They  further- 
more have  the  advantage  that  they  are  exactly  suited 
to  photomicrography,  there  being  exact  coincidence 
between  the  photographic  and  visual  image,  which  in 
the  achromatic  objectives  is  not  the  case,  as  these  must 
be  either  corrected  for  photography,  when  they  are  not 
satisfactory  for  ordinary  purposes,  or  an  allowance 
must  be  made  for  the  difference  between  the  visual  and 
chemical  images  in  the  camera,  which  is  very  difficult. 

One  objection  to  the  high  powers  has  been  the 
liability  to  deterioration  of  some  of  the  materials  used, 
which  has  happily  been  overcome  by  Prof.  Chas.  S. 
Hastings  in  the  apochromatic  objectives  computed 
by  him. 


103 


Eyepiece  or  Ocular.  The  purpose  of  the  eye- 
piece is  to  refract  the  diverging  rays  coming  from  the 
objective  so  that  they  will  reach  the  pupil  of  the  eye 
and  at  the  same  time  magnify  the  image  formed  by  the 
objective.  While  it  is  the  most  simple  part  of  the 
optical  combination  of  the  microscope  it  is,  withal,  an 
important  part  of  it.  In  fact  it  may  be  said  that,  owing 
probably  to  its  simplicity,  it  has  been  neglected,  and 
very  often  eyepieces  are  furnished  which  are  not  at  all 
commensurate  with  the  quality  of  the  objectives. 

Designation.  While  eyepieces  are  still  marked 
by  some  makers  arbitrarily  without  any  relation  to  their 
optical  value,  a  rational  system  is  to  mark  them  accord- 
ing to  the  equivalent  focus  of  the  two  lenses. 

Thus  an  eyepiece  marked  i  inch  has  an  initial 
magnification  of  ten  diameters,  a  2  inch,  five  diameters, 
and  so  on. 

Field  of  View.  As  has  been  stated  this  is  the 
visible  area  which  is  limited  by  the  size  of  the  dia- 
phragm. 

While  the  relative  size  of  field  in  eyepieces  of 
different  powers  is  the  same,  the  actual  field  of  view 
as  it  relates  to  the  image  becomes  less  as  the  power 
of  the  eyepiece  increases.  Thus  if  a  i  1-2  inch  will 
show  i- 10  inch  of  the  object  within  the  limits  of  the 
field,  a  3-4  inch  will  show  only  1-20  inch.  By  some 

104 


persons  it  has  been  supposed  that  an  enlargement  of 
the  microscope  tube  would  permit  a  large  field,  but  this 
is  not  so  in  ordinary  eyepieces  as  the  optical  conditions 


Fig.  39. 

prescribe  well  defined  limits  and  larger  field  can  only 
be  obtained  with  specially  constructed  eyepieces. 


I05 


Par  Focal  Eyepieces.  Important  as  it  is  to 
have  objectives  par  focal,  it  is  fully  as  much  so  with 
eyepieces  as  they  are  often  changed  with  the  same 


Fig.  40. 

objective  to  obtain  a  change  in  magnifying  power.     It 
is  a  great  convenience  to  use  one  or  another   without 

106 


disturbing  the  focus  more  than  the  fine  adjustment 
will  easily  rectify. 

Eyepieces  are  divided  into  two  classes : 

Negative  eyepieces,  Fig.  39,  in  which  the  focal  point 
is  within  the  eyepiece  itself  and  between  eye  lens  e  I 
and  field  lens //or  at  the  diaphragm  d  d. 

Positive  eyepieces,  Fig.  40,  in  which  the  focal  point 
is  outside  and  below  the  field  lens  f  1.  These  eye- 
pieces  can  be  used  as  magnifiers. 

Huyghenian  Eyepiece.  This  form  is  named 
after  Huyghens,  who  is  said  to  have  first  used  it.  It  is 
the  construction  which  is  in  most  general  use,  although 
made  up  in  a  variety  of  mountings.  It  is  negative  and 
consists,  as  has  already  been  stated,  Fig.  39,  of  an 
eye  lens,  e  I,  nearest  the  eye,  and  a  field  or  collective 
lens,  f  I,  which  is  the  large  lens  nearest  the  objective. 
Between  them  and  placed  at  the  focus  of  the  eye  lens  is 
a  perforated,  blackened  disc,  called  a  diaphragm,  d  d, 
which  limits  the  size  of  field  and  shows  it  within  a 
sharply  defined  border.  The  Huyghenian  eyepiece  is 
made  in  two  forms : 

The  English  type  as  shown  in  Fig.  41,  which  has 
a  large  tube  fitting  into  the  microscope  tube  and  a 
neck  or  smaller  tube  which  is  usually  arranged  with 
a  cap  to  slide  over  the  eye  lens. 

The  Continental  type,  Fig.  42,  has  a  straight  tube 
which  drops  entirely  into  the  tube  of  the  microscope 
and  rests  upon  the  mounting  of  the  eye  lens. 

107 


Solid  Eyepiece  is  also  a  negative  eyepiece  and  is 
the  invention  of  the  late  Robert  B.  Tolles.  It  is  called 
solid,  from  the  fact  that  instead  of  being  composed  of  two 
lenses,  it  consists  of  one  piece  of  glass,  Fig.  43,  which 
is  cut  to  a  cylindrical  form  and  on  the  ends  of  which 
the  proper  curvatures  are  ground  and  polished.  The 
diaphragm  is  made  by  cutting  a  circular  groove  into 
the  glass  at  the  proper  distance  between  the  two  sur- 
faces, which  is  then  filled  up  with  an  opaque  pigment. 


Fig.  41. 


Fig.  42. 


These  eyepieces  are  made  only  in  high  powers,  as 
optical  glass  is  usually  not  of  sufficient  homogeneity 
to  make  low  powers,  and  their  cost  would  be  too  con- 
siderable without  a  corresponding  advantage.  They 
are  usually  made  only  in  powers  of  1-2  inch  and 
stronger  and  for  this  reason  have  but  a  limited  use. 


1 08 


Ramsden  Eyepiece  is  a  positive  eyepiece,  Fig.  40, 
and  is  constructed  of  two  plane  convex  lenses  with  the 
convex  surfaces  toward  each  other.  It  is  especially 
useful  as  a  micrometer  eyepiece  in  microscopes  and 
telescopes,  as  it  is  used  as  a  magnifier  on  the  fine 
divisions  of  the  micrometer  and  at  the  same  time  gives 
the  virtual  image. 


Fig.  44. 


Periscopic,  Orthoscopic  arid  Kellner  Eye- 
pieces are  also  positive  eyepieces  which  are  achro- 
matized by  having  the  eye  lens  a  doublet  or  triplet. 
The  spherical  correction  is  such  as  to  produce  a  large 
and  flat  field,  Fig.  44. 

Projection  Eyepiece.  This  is  constructed  to 
throw  an  enlarged  image  on  a  screen  at  a  distance 
from  the  instrument  and  for  photographing  the  image. 


109 


For  neither  of  these  purposes  can  the  ordinary  eyepiece 
be  used.  It  is  provided  with  a  mechanical  means  of 
varying  the  distance  between  the  eye  and  field  lens  for 
the  purpose  of  changing  magnifying  power. 

Micrometer  Eyepiece.     A  micrometer  is  a  strip 
of  glass  upon  which  a  series  of  regularly  spaced  lines 
are  ruled  having  definite  values  in  fractions  of  an  inch 
or  millimeter  and   is   used  to   measure  the  size  of  an 
object.      When    used   with   the 
eyepiece  it  must  be  situated  in 
the  focus  of  the  eye  lens   and 
rests  either  upon  the  diaphragm 
or  in  slots  provided  on  opposite 
sides  of  the  mounting. 

Another  form  is  one  in  which 
the  micrometer  is  a  permanent 
part  of  the  eyepiece  and  is  pro- 
vided with  a  screw  adjustment  to  move  it  to  different 
points  in  the  field  of  view,  Fig.  45. 

Binocular  Eyepiece  is  one  constructed  to  bisect 
the  beam  of  light  which  comes  from  the  objective, 
thus  rendering  the  image  visible  to  both  eyes  and  pro- 
ducing a  stereoscopic  effect.  It  is  applicable  to  the 
monocular  microscope. 

Erecting  Eyepiece  is  composed  of  four  systems 
of  lenses  instead  of  two,  some  of  which  are  sometimes 


Fig.  45. 


110 


made  achromatic.  As  the  regular  eyepiece  of  two 
systems  reverses  the  image,  the  erecting  eyepiece  again 
reverses  it,  thus  bringing  the  image  back  to  the  original 
position*  of  the  object.  It  is  seldom  used  with  the 
microscope,  but  is  necessary  with  small  hand  telescopes 
and  in  the  telescopes  of  surveying  instruments. 

Index  Eyepiece  is  one  which  is  provided  with 
an  index  or  pointer  to  indicate  a  particular  object  in  the 
field  or  a  certain  structure  of  an  object  and  is  especially 
valuable  in  class  demonstration.  The  index  can  be 
swung  in  and  out  of  the  field  at  will.  Any  of  the 
Huyghenian  eyepieces  may  be  converted  into  an  index 
eyepiece  by  cementing  with  shellac  or  Canada  balsam  an 
eye-lash  or  sharp  black  paper  wedge  to  the  diaphragm 
with  the  point  toward  the  center  of  the  field. 

Compensating  Eyepiece.  In  this  place  it  is 
also  proper  to  speak  of  the  new  compensating  eyepiece 
as  made  by  Prof.  Abbe.  This  eyepiece  compensates 
for  the  residual  errors  in  the  apochromatic  objectives 
and  is  of  no  value  except  when  used  with  them  as 
it  is  highly  over-corrected,  as  can  be  seen  at  the  edge 
of  the  field,  which  has  a  strong  orange  color,  whereas 
in  the  Huyghenian  it  has  a  blue  color. 

In  this  series  of  eyepieces  there  is  a  searcher  which 
is  of  low  power  and  intended  to  find  objects.  The 
higher  powers  are  for  general  work,  some  of  them 

in 


being  negative,  the  others  positive.  '  Another  kind  is 
the  projection  eyepiece  which  is  intended  for  projecting  an 
image  on  a  photographic  plate,  or  on  a  screen  or  wall. 

Defects.  As  has  been  stated  many  eyepieces  are 
carelessly  constructed  and  possess  defects  which  inter- 
fere with  obtaining  a  distinct  image.  These  defects 
do  not  show  easily  with  low  power  objectives,  but  can 
readily  be  seen  with  high  powers.  The  most  frequently 
occurring  fault  is  the  lack  of  perfect  grinding  and 
polishing  of  the  lens  surfaces.  If  the  former,  it  will 
show  itself  as  spots  in  the  field,  and  if  the  latter,  as  a 
series  of  streaks  and  shadows,  usually  circular  in  form 
as  if  the  lens  had  been  wiped  with  greasy  fingers. 

Another  defect  may  be  in  the  glass  itself,  in  the 
so  called  striae,  which  will  be  indicated  by  dark  and 
light  streaks  across  the  field. 

Care  must  be  taken  not  to  confound  small  particles 
of  dust  which  are  apt  to  fall  upon  the  field  lens  and 
which  at  times  are  very  prominent  in  the  field,  with 
imperfections  of  the  surface.  These  can  be  dis- 
tinguished from  other  defects  only  by  wiping,  or  using 
a  camel's  hair  brush,  and  even  with  the  utmost  care 
some  particles  are  liable  to  remain. 

The  eyepiece  often  fits  too  closely  in  the  tube  and 
when  making  observations  with  high  powers,  a  change 
of  eyepiece  is  apt  to  disturb  the  object.  It  should 


enter  without  any  friction  and  still  tit  so  closely  that  it 
drops  slowly  into  its  place  from  the  compression  of  air 
in  the  tube  when  the  objective  is  attached. 

In  the  course  of  time  a  film  is  apt  to  form  on  the 
surfaces  <sf  lenses,  which  will  cause  indistinctness  in  the 
image.  It  is  advisable  to  periodically  unscrew  both  eye 
and  field  lens  from  the  mounting  and  carefully  wipe 
the  inner  and  outer  surfaces.  In  conclusion  it  may  be 
said  in  a  general  way  that  the  layman  has  rarely  the 
fundamental  knowledge  and  sufficiently  long  experience 
to  judge  critically  of  imperfections  which  may  exist. 

The  idea  is  quite  prevalent  that  there  is  a  wide 
variation  in  objectives  of  the  same  type  from  the  same 
maker.  While  this  is  quite  true  as  between  objectives 
of  different  makers  and  also  of  makers  whose  pro- 
cesses of  production  have  remained  the  same  as  those 
of  former  years,  it  is  not  so  with  the  products  of  those 
progressive  firms  who  by  common  consent  stand  at  the 
head  in  their  respective  countries.  Precise  and  delicate 
as  the  various  stages  of  production  are,  rigid  control 
and  inspection  removes  all  personal  factors  and  elimin- 
nates  all  chance  in  the  final  result.  We  do  not  mean  to 
argue  that  the  work  of  the  best  should  be  unquestioned  ; 
on  the  contrary,  it  is  advisable  to  examine  all  work 
critically,  and  preferably  by  comparison,  and  we  are 
sure  progressive  makers  will  welcome  all  efforts  in  this 
direction  and  will  lend  their  aid  to  a  more  intelligent 
use  of  their  products. 


HOW  TO  WORK. 


How  to  Set  Up  the  Instrument.  Draw  the 
instrument  from  the  case  by  grasping  the  base  and 
pillar,  free  it  from  dust  with  a  large  camel's  hair  brush 
i  inch  or  i  1-2  inch  wide  or  by  wiping  carefully  with 
a  chamois  skin  or  old  linen  handkerchief.  Place  the 
instrument  on  the  work  table,  which  should  be  of  such 
height  that  observations  can  be  made  with  the  utmost 
possible  comfort  without  straining  the  neck  or  com- 
pressing the  chest.  Bear  in  mind  always  to  sit  as 
upright  as  possible. 

If  the  instrument  is  used  in  the  upright  position, 
place  the  base  close  to  the  edge  of  the  table;  if 
inclined,  it  may  set  farther  in.  Rest  the  arms,  as 
much  as  the  height  of  the  instrument  will  permit,  upon 
the  table. 

Bring  the  tube  to  the  standard  length  for  which  the 
objectives  are  corrected.  To  do  this  grasp  the  milled 
edge  of  the  draw-tube  and  give  it  a  spiral  motion  while 
holding  the  main  tube  with  the  other  hand,  page  50. 
There  is  an  objection,  however,  that  in  any  but  cloth- 
lined  sheaths  the  polished  tube  will  soon  be  scratched, 

114 


especially  if  not  kept  very  clean.  In  stands  without 
the  graduated  tube,  a  mark  or  ring  is  or  should  be 
provided  on  it,  which  should  be  made  to  coincide  with 


Correct  position  at  the  microscope. 

the  upper  end   of  main   tube.     Where  the  graduated 
draw-tube  is  provided  bring  the  proper  figure,  either 


216  or  1 60,  in  line  with  the  upper  end  of  the  main 
tube,  in  accordance  with  the  tube  length  for  which  the 
objectives  are  corrected. 

Attach  low  power  eyepiece. 
Attach  low  power  objective. 
Place  object  on  stage. 
Illuminate  object. 
Focus  on  object. 

To  Attach  Eyepiece.  The  exterior  surfaces  of 
the  eye  lens  and  field  lens  being  exposed  are  apt  to 
become  dusty  and  should  always  be  carefully  cleaned 
before  using.  If  there  are  two  or  more  eyepieces, 
always  use  the  lowest  power  first.  Eyepieces  should 
be  so  loosely  fitted  that  they  will  drop  into  the  tube  as 
far  as  the  collar  by  their  own  weight.  They  do  this 
slowly  when  the  objective  is  attached,  as  an  airtight 
compartment  is  formed  and  air  to  the  extent  of  the 
dimensions  of  the  eyepiece  must  first  be  expelled  from 
the  tube.  This  displacement  of  air  may,  however,  be 
hastened  by  gently  pushing  the  eyepiece  downward, 
but  not  to  such  an  extent  as  to  push  in  the  draw-tube, 
or  force  down  the  coarse  adjustment.  In  fact,  care 
must  be  used  in  applying  the  eyepiece,  or  sliding  the 
draw-tube,  as  the  focus  may  be  disturbed,  or  the 
objective  forced  against  the  object  and  thus  destroy  it. 

116 


To  Attach  Objective.  Using  a  low  power 
objective,  remove  from  its  box  and  see  that  its  front 
lens  is  clean ;  elevate  the  tube  of  the  stand  by  means 
of  the  coarse  adjustment  so  that  the  nose-piece  shall  be 
at  least  fwo  inches  from  the  stage. 


Proper  manner  of  holding  objective  when  attaching  it  to  tube. 

Grasp  the  upper  knurled  edge  of  objective  between 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand ;  bring  the  screw 
in  contact  with  the  screw  of  the  nose-piece  and,  keeping 
the  objective  in  line  with  the  tube  and  gently  pressing 
upward,  revolve  the  objective  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand  by  the  lower  milled  edge  until 
shoulder  sets  against  shoulder. 


117 


To  properly  attach  an  objective  is  not  always  simple 
and  can  not  be  done  too  carefully.  One  danger  lies  in 
the  fact  that  the  objective  may  be  dropped  onto  the 
object  and  thus  injure  or  destroy  one  or  the  other  or 
both,  and  another  that  the  threads  may  be  started  wrong 
by  holding  the  objective  sideways  and  the  threads 
injured. 

In  this  connection  we  draw  particular  attention 
again  to  the  convenience  of  the  double,  triple  and 
quadruple  nose-pieces.  The  convenience  which  is 
obtained  from  their  use,  freedom  from  danger  to  objec- 
tives and  saving  of  time,  commend  them  in  all  cases 
where  two  or  more  objectives  are  used. 

Finding  an  Object.  The  slide  upon  which  the 
object  is  mounted  is  placed  upon  the  front  of  the  stage 
and  slipped  under  the  two  spring  clips  to  a  point 
where  the  object  comes  as  nearly  as  possible  in  the 
center  of  the  opening  of  the  stage.  The  slide  should 
pass  easily  under  the  clips,  which,  however,  is  not 
the  case  when  the  forward  ends  of  the  clips  are 
too  bluntly  rounded  or  when  they  are  too  stiff.  In 
either  case  the  clips  may  be  bent  so  that  the  slide  will 
work  easily.  Some  persons  prefer  to  work  without 
clips,  but  this  can  only  be  done  after  considerable 
experience  has  been  acquired  and  only  when  the  instru- 
ment is  in  an  upright  position. 

118 


With  the  low  power  objectives,  which  are  used  on 
coarse  and  large  objects,  it  will  be  found  after  properly 
focusing,  that  a  portion  of  the  object  will  show  itself  in 
the  field  and  by  moving  the  slide  it  can  easily  be 
brought, to  the  center.  In  this  connection  it  must  be 
remembered  that  the  image  in  the  eyepiece  is  in  a 
reversed  position  from  that  of  the  object  and  that  a 
movement  of  the  object  to  the  left  gives  an  apparent 
movement  to  the  right  in  the  field.  This  will  create 
confusion  at  the  outset,  but  after  a  little  practice  the 
movement  becomes  involuntary.  In  the  case  of  a  small 
object  which  is  not  found  after  the  objective  is  known 
to  be  in  focus,  as  may  be  told  if  the  mounting  medium 
or  small  particles  of  dust  on  the  cover  glass  are  visible, 
move  the  slide  about  on  the  stage  by  grasping  one  end 
with  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  when  the  object  can 
usually  be  recognized  by  the  shadowy  outlines  as  it 
flits  across  the  field.  The  difficulty  of  finding  an 
object  or  a  particular  spot  in  it  becomes  more  difficult 
with  the  increase  in  power  and  even  in  experienced 
hands  becomes  quite  vexatious.  Recourse  may  be  had 
to  two  methods  : 

By  using  a  low  power  eyepiece, 

By  using  a  low  power  objective  as  a  finder. 

A  large  field  is  thus  obtained  in  which  the  object 
may  be  more  easily  found,  and  after  moving  to  the 
center  of  the  field  the  objective  is  removed  and  the 
high  power  attached  ;  or  in  case  revolving  nose-piece 

119 


is  used,  use  the  low  power  objective  as  a  finder 
then  swing  the  high  power  objective  into  position, 
care  being  taken  not  to  touch  the  slide,  and  focus  in 
the  manner  to  be  described.  The  object  may  not  be 
in  the  field,  due  to  a  slight  variation  in  the  centers  of 
the  objectives,  but  it  will  certainly  be  very  close  and 
ought  to  be  easily  found. 

The  mechanical  stage  in  either  the  fixed  or  attach- 
able form  will  be  found  to  greatly  facilitate  work  in  this 
direction,  particularly  if  the  object  is  minute  and  if  in 
an  important  investigation  one  desires  to  be  absolutely 
convinced  that  the  whole  field  has  been  covered,  as  for 
instance  in  the  search  for  bacilli. 

To  Illuminate  the  Object.  This  is  an 
extremely  important  feature  and  should  always  be 
carefully  done,  as  one  may  easily  fail  to  obtain  the 
best  results,  may  be  led  to  wrong  conclusions,  or  may 
injure  the  eyes. 

The  mirrors  of  the  microscope  are  usually  plane 
and  concave  and  are  provided  with  universal  joint,  so 
as  to  reflect  the  light  from  any  source  in  front  or  at 
the  side  of  the  microscope. 

The  plane  mirror,  Fig.  46,  reflects  the  light  in  the 
initial  intensity  of  its  source  and  is  used  with  low 
power  objectives.  The  concave  mirror,  Fig.  47,  con- 
centrates the  rays  on  the  object  and  thereby  gives 
intensified  illumination  and  is  used  with  medium  and 


high  power  objectives,  except  when  substage  condenser 
is  used,   which  subject  is  left  for  future  consideration. 

The  sources  of  light  are  either  daylight  or  artificial 
light.  In  the  former  the  light  from  a  northern  sky  is 
preferable  and  in  the  latter  a  flat-wick  oil  lamp,  or  a 
Welsbach  gas  burner.  An  ordinary  gas  flame  should 
not  be  used  on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  obtaining 
equal  illumination  and  the  constant  flickering  which  is 
very  injurious.  When  using  the  flat-wick  lamp  the 
narrow  edge  of  the  flame  should  be  used,  as  this  is 
more  intense  than  the  broad  side. 


Fig.  46.  Fig.  47. 

Illuminating  object  with  plane  mirror.      Illuminating  object  with  concave  mirror. 

When  using  daylight  place  the  microscope,  as 
nearly  as  possible,  directly  before  a  window,  and  when 
a  lamp  is  employed  have  it  on  the  table  either  in  front 
or  at  the  right  side  of  the  microscope  and  within 
easy  reach. 


Light  is  either  transmitted  or  reflected.  When  the 
former,  it  is  used  to  illuminate  transparent  objects  and 
passes  through  the  objects  from  below  the  stage  into 
the  objective.  In  opaque  objects  this  is  impossible 
and  reflected  light  is  required,  when  it  is  directed  onto 
the  object  from  above  and  illuminates  its  upper  surface. 
In  the  following  instructions  it  is  assumed  that  trans- 
mitted light  is  used  unless  otherwise  stated. 

The  concave  mirror  converges  the  light  and  there- 
fore has  a  focal  point,  and  it  is  evident  that  if  its  focus 
is  of  such  length  that  with  parallel  rays  (daylight)  it 
will  fall  on  the  object,  the  focus  will  be  longer  with 
diverging  rays  (lamplight)  and  when  no  provision  is 
made  in  the  instrument  to  adjust  the  mirror  to  meet 
these  two  conditions,  it  becomes  difficult  and  some- 
times impossible  in  critical  work  to  obtain  the  best 
results.  For  this  and  other  advantages  an  additional 
illuminating  apparatus,  called  a  condenser,  is  now  com- 
monly used  with  medium  and  high  power  objectives. 

Before  lighting  an  object  make  certain  that  the 
mirror-bar  is  in  exactly  central  position  and  set  the 
mirror  at  such  an  angle  to  the  light  that  it  will  be 
directed  upon  the  object,  which  can  be  done  most 
quickly  at  the  outset  by  observing  the  object  directly, 
keeping  the  head  at  one  side  of  the  tube.  Now 
remove  the  eyepiece  and  observe  the  light  through  the 
objective.  It  should  be  central  and  of  equal  intensity, 
which  with  daylight  is  sometimes  difficult  to  obtain  as 


the  sash  of  the  window  may  be  reflected  and  show  itself 
in  the  field  as  dark  bands,  or  in  the  case  of  lamplight 
the  blue  portion  of  the  flame  may  appear  as  a  dark 
spot.  These  are  only  preliminary  directions  but  will 
suffice  for  a  beginning.  There  will  be  little  difficulty 
in  obtaining  proper  illumination  at  the  outset,  if  one 
will  observe  the  following  : 

Remove  the  eyepiece  and,  looking  through  the  back 
of  the  objective,  have 

Central  illumination, 
Even  illumination  over  the  entire  field, 
Mellow  illumination. 

Defects  in  illumination  which  may  not  be  apparent 
will  show7  when  the  eyepiece  is  replaced. 
Defective  lighting  is  indicated, 

When  dark  points  or  shadows   appear   in    the 

field, 
When   the  outlines  of  an   object   are   bright  on 

one  side  and  dark  on  the  other, 
When  the  object  appears  to  lie    in    a  glare    of 
light. 

In  the  first  two  cases  the  correction  can  be  made 
by  suitably  adjusting  the  position  of  the  mirror ;  in 
the  last  by  reducing  the  amount  of  light  by  the  use 
of  a  diaphragm. 

It  is  now  generally  conceded  that  observations  with 
the  microscope  may  be  made  to  any  extent  without 

123 


any  detrimental  results  to  the  eyes,  provided,  however, 
that  the  conditions  of  light  are  just  right.  It  is  a  good 
rule  to  follow,  to  use  as  small  an  amount  of  illumination 
as  will  comfortably  show  the  structure  which  is  being 
studied,  and  it  may  also  be  safely  accepted  that  if  the 
eye  tires  or  feels  uncomfortable  the  light  should  be 
moderated. 

Illumination  is  either  : 

Central  or  axial,  when  the  center  of  the  mirror 
is  in  the  optical  axis,  or 

Oblique,  when  the  mirror  is  swung  to  one  side 
which,  in  objectives  of  wide  aperture,  will  disclose  struc- 
ture that  cannot  be  seen  with  central  illumination. 

To  Focus  an  objective  is  to  adjust  its  relation  to 
the  object  so  that  a  clear  image  is  obtained.  To 
properly  and  safely  focus  an  objective  is  a  matter  of 
great  importance  and  a  certain  line  of  procedure  should 
be  followed,  which  in  time  should  become  habitual. 
Focusing  should  involve  no  danger  to  the  front  lens 
of  the  objective  or  to  the  cover  glass  by  their  coming 
in  violent  contact.  With  the  low  power  objectives,  in 
which  the  working  distance  is  great,  there  should  be 
little  danger ;  with  the  higher  power  objectives,  in 
which  the  working  distance  is  so  small  that  the  front 
of  the  objective  is  very  close  to  the  cover  glass,  there 
is  considerable. 


124 


To  focus  low  power  objectives : 

Attach  objective  to  the  nose-piece.  Lower  the  head 
to  the  level  of  the  stage  and,  watching  the  front  of  the 
objective,  lower  the  tube  by  the  coarse  adjustment  until 
the  front  of  the  objective  is  within  one  quarter  inch  of 
the  object ;  look  through  the  eyepiece  and  slowly  elevate 
by  the  coarse  adjustment  until  the  image  is  distinct. 
Use  fine  adjustment. 

The  upward  movement  should  be  slow  so  that  if 
the  object  be  faint  it  is  not  missed  and  the  adjustment 
not  run  beyond  its  focal  distance  ;  or  it  is  possible  that 
in  the  case  of  a  very  minute  object  it  may  be  out  of 
the  center  and  thus  out  of  the  field  of  vision,  in  which 
case  the  surface  of  the  cover  glass  or  the  minute 
particles  of  dust  upon  it  should  be  distinguishable. 

The  object  will  first  appear  with  faint  outlines  and 
indistinct,  then  gradually  more  distinct  and  finally 
sharply  defined,  and  if  the  adjustment  goes  beyond 
this  point  it  will  gradually  become  more  dim,  in  which 
case  return  to  the  point  of  greatest  distinctness. 

To  focus  high  power  objectives  : 

Attach  objective  to  nose-piece.  Lower  the  head  to 
the  level  of  the  stage  and  look  between  objective  and  cover 
glass  toward  a  window  or  flame.  Slowly  lower  the 
objective  with  the  coarse  adjustment  until  the  front  of 
the  objective  is  nearly  in  contact  with  the  cover  glass  ; 
look  into  the  eyepiece  and  slowly  elevate  the  tube  vuith 

I25 


the  coarse  adjustment  until  the  image  appears.  Use 
fine  adjustment. 

It  is  also  advisable  while  watching  for  the  image 
to  appear  to  move  the  object  slightly  in  different  direc- 
tions, as  the  flitting  of  shadows  or  colors  across  the 
field  will  give  indications  that  the  objective  is  nearing 
the  focal  point. 

Always  focus  upward.  In  case  a  low  power  is 
exchanged  for  a  higher  power  objective  or  when  the 
low  power  has  been  used  as  a  searcher,  i.  e.,  to  find  a 
certain  object  in  a  collection  or  a  certain  locality  on  a 
specimen,  the  tube  should  first  be  elevated  as  the 
working  distance  in  the  high  power  is  too  short  to 
admit  of  screwing  it  into  the  nose-piece,  then  detach 
the  low  power,  attach  the  high  power  and  proceed  to 
focus  in  the  order  given. 

The  method  of  procedure  with  the  revolving  nose- 
pieces,  either  double,  triple  or  quadruple,  is  different. 
The  writer  believes  he  was  the  first  to  establish  the 
commercial  possibilities  of  making  two  and  more  objec- 
tives in  revolving  nose-pieces  par  focal,  i.  e.,  to  so 
adjust  the  focus  of  each  objective  that  when  either 
one  in  swung  into  position  it  is  nearly  focused  and 
requires  the  use  of  the  fine  adjustment  only.  This 
feature  not  only  adds  to  the  comfort  of  using  objec- 
tives, but  facilitates  work  and  removes  the  danger  of 
objectives  coming  in  violent  contact  with  the  cover 
glass.  Very  low  power  objectives  vary  from  those 

126 


powers  which  make  up  the  usual  outfit,  and  it  is  some- 
times impossible  to  make  them  par  focal.  The  2-3 
and  1-6  or  1-8  on  the  double  nose-piece,  and  the  2-3, 
1-6  or  1-8,  and  1-12  oil  immersion  on  the  triple 
nose-piece  can  be  so  made.  But  in  a  combination  of 
a  lower  power  with  the  2-3  and  1-6  on  the  triple  nose- 
piece,  or  a  lower  power  with  the  2-3,  1-6  and  1-12  on 
a  quadruple  nose-piece,  it  is  impossible  to  make  the 
lower  power  par  focal  with  the  others  on  account  of 
the  considerably  greater  working  distance. 

As  the  adjustment  of  the  objectives  to  make  them 
par  focal  is  quite  delicate  each  screw  in  the  nose-piece 
should  be  marked  to  correspond  with  the  power  of  the 
objective  which  is  to  go  into  it. 

To  focus  with  double  nose-piece : 

Screw  each  objective  into  proper  place  in  the  double 
nose-piece,  with  the  2-3  opposite  the  opening  through 
which  the  light  passes. 

Hold  the  nose-piece  in  the  right  hand,  objectives  down; 
bring  the  revolving  screw  in  contact  with  the  screw  in 
the  tube,  square  with  tube ;  with  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  left  hand  turn  milled  edge  of  revolving  screw  until 
it  engages  ;  swing  nose-piece  toward  the  front  and,  hold- 
ing it  in  this  position,  screw  the  ring  home. 

Focus  with  2-j  objective,  then  swing  nose-piece 
until  1-6  nears  the  cover  glass ;  lower  the  head  to  the 
level  of  stage ;  endeavor  to  slowly  swing  objective  in 

127 


place.  Should  the  front  of  objective  come  in  contact 
with  the  cover  glass  or  with  the  ring  of  cement  on  its 
surface  the  tube  must  be  elevated  and  the  objective 
focused. 

In  the  event  of  the  objectives  not  being  par  focal, 
the  difference  in  their  focal  distance  should  be  noted 
for  further  use ;  if  little,  by  the  amount  of  turn  of  the 
micrometer  screw,  if  considerable,  by  the  extent  of 
adjustment  required  with  the  coarse  adjustment. 

The  method  of  procedure  with  the  triple  and 
quadruple  nose-piece  is  very  much  the  same  as  with 
the  double,  and  the  same  rules  will  apply.  In  the  case 
of  oil  immersion  1-12  objective  apply  oil  to  the  front 
of  objective  before  the  nose-piece  is  screwed  on  the 
tube,  and  if  after  use  the  nose-piece  is  left  on  the  micro- 
scope carefully  wipe  the  oil  from  the  objective. 

In  case  the  coarse  adjustment  is  by  sliding  tube 
instead  of  rack  and  pinion  elevate  and  depress  the 
tube  by  grasping  the  milled  edge  between  the  thumb 
and  forefinger,  giving  the  tube  a  spiral  motion.  (See 
page  50.) 

To  Focus  with  Fine  Adjustment.  After  the 
focus  has  been  found  with  the  coarse  adjustment  the 
fine  adjustment  should  be  brought  into  action,  in  order 
to  obtain  a  more  sensitive  and  reliable  adjustment  for 
focusing  through  the  different  planes  or  depths  of  the 
object.  Its  range  of  movement  is  necessarily  short 

128 


and  at  one  end  the  screw  comes  to  a  stop  and  at 
the  other  goes  beyond  the  limit  of  movement  and 
becomes  inoperative.  It  should  always  be  kept  as 
near  as  possible  at  the  medium  point  of  its  range. 
Grasp  the  milled  head  of  the  fine  adjustment  between 
the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  one  hand  (right)  turning 
the  screw  in  either  direction  to  focus  in  different  planes 
of  the  object,  while  the  other  hand  (left)  moves  the 
object. 

"  In  the  manipulation  of  the  microscope  it  is  not 
uncommon  to  observe  the  operator  rolling  the  milled 
head  of  theflne  adjustment  instead  of  firmly  grasping 
it  between  the  finger  and  thumb  and  governing,  to  the 
minutest  fraction  of  arc,  the  amount  of  alteration  he 
desires.  It  is  undesirable  and  an  entirely  inexpert 
procedure  to  roll  the  milled  head,  and  cannot  yield  the 
fine  results  which  a  delicate  mastery  of  this  part  of  the 
instrument  necessitates  and  implies.  To  use  aright 
the  fine  adjustment  of  a  first-class  microscope  is  not 
the  first  and  easiest  thing  mastered  by  the  tyro.  We 
have  already  intimated  that  the  fine  adjustment  should 
never  be  resorted  to  while  the  coarse  adjustment  can 
be  efficiently  employed.  The  focus  should  always  be 
found,  even  with  the  highest  powers,  by  means  of  the 
coarse  adjustment."  (Carpenter,  The  Microscope  and 
its  Revelations.) 

Use  of  Substage  Diaphragm.  The  intelligent 
use  of  the  diaphragm  is  a  great  aid  to  good  results, 

129 


and  while  a  few  hints  can  be  given  to  guide  the  begin- 
ner, practice  will,  after  all,  lead  to  the  best  results. 
The  purpose  of  the  diaphragm  is  to  modify  the  amount 
of  light  and  by  its  aid  obtain  results  in  the  definition 
of  the  object  which  without  it  are  impossible.  Much 
will  depend  upon  the  density  of  the  object,  the  intensity 
of  illumination,  and  the  power  of  the  objective.  As 
already  stated  the  plane  mirror  should  be  used  with 
the  low  powers.  The  diaphragm  of  any  form  should 
be  close  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  stage,  and  if 
possible  adjustable  with  respect  to  the  object.  This 
is  to  prevent  any  amount  of  extraneous  light  from  the 
mirror  reaching  the  object  and  not  to  shut  out  any  of 
the  useful  light. 

Use  an  opening  in  the  diaphragm  of  about  the  same 
size  as  the  front  lens  in  the  objective.  As  a  rule  this 
will  be  found  to  give  a  super-abundance  of  light, 
especially  in  the  low  power  objectives,  and  by  reducing 
the  aperture  it  will  be  found  that  there  will  be  an 
increased  differentiation  in  the  object.  If  in  medium 
and  high  power  objectives  the  illumination  is  insuf- 
ficient, it  is  not  due  to  the  size  of  the  diaphragm, 
unless  this  lies  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the 
object,  but  to  the  insufficiency  of  illumination.  The 
diaphragm  should  be  reduced  to  a  point  where  the 
amount  of  illumination  will  be  perfectly  comfortable  to 
the  eye.  Very  often  better  results  are  obtained  by 
varying  the  distance  of  the  diaphragm  from  the  object 

130 


and   it   is   easily  recognized  when  better  definition   is 
obtained  in  this  way. 

Do  not  use  so  large  an  opening  that  there  will  be 
an  uncomfortable  glare,  nor  so  small  that  undue 
exertion  is  required  to  see  structure. 

When  oblique  light  is  used  there  should  be  no 
obstruction  to  the  course  of  light.  If  a  cap  diaphragm 
is  used  with  central  illumination,  it  should  be  entirely 
removed  with  oblique  illumination.  With  the  iris 
diaphragm  the  full  opening  should  be  employed.  In 
the  case  of  the  revolving  diaphragm  which  generally  is 
some  distance  from  the  object  it  should  be  removed  if 
possible,  and  if  not,  the  largest  opening  should  be  used. 

Which  Eye  to  Use.  The  right  eye  is  generally 
used  for  observations,  but  while  the  manipulator  may 
from  habit  be  inclined  to  use  this,  it  may  be  possible 
that  in  some  cases  the  left  can  be  used  to  better 
advantage  and  with  less  fatigue.  It  is  a  fact  well 
known  to  oculists  and  opticians  that  many  eyes  are 
defective,  of  which  fact  the  possessors  may  not  be 
aware.  Short  or  long  sightedness  has  little  or  no 
influence  in  viewing  an  object,  except  to  require  a 
different  adjustment,  but  so-called  astigmatism,  a  defect 
of  the  eye  which  makes  it  impossible  to  see  in  a  certain 
axis  distinctly,  may  influence  the  best  results.  If  this 
error  is  corrected  by  wearing  glasses  and  these  are  used 
while  making  observations,  either  eye  can  be  used. 

13* 


But  in  order  to  determine  whether  a  defect  exists,  of 
which  the  possessor  is  not  aware,  observe  closely  first 
with  one  eye  then  with  the  other  an  object,  preferably 
one  with  fine  striations  such  as  a  diatom,  to  learn 
whether  with  one  eye  a  better  view  is  obtained  than 
with  the  other  and  use  the  one  giving  the  best  results. 

Make  it  a  habit  at  the  outset  to  keep  both  eyes 
open. 

There  is  one  point  over  the  lens  called  the  eye-point, 
Fig.  39,  e p,  at  which  the  rays  cross  within  the  smallest 
compass,  and  this  is  the  proper  position  for  the  eye  as 
the  largest  number  of  rays  enter  it.  When  above  or 
below  this  point  the  size  of  field  will  be  reduced  or 
shadows  or  colors  will  appear  in  it.  In  low  power 
eyepieces  the  eye-point  is  some  distance  from  the  lens ; 
in  high  powers  quite  close  to  it — in  fact  in  some  so 
close  that  the  eyelashes  rest  upon  the  lens  and  some- 
times appear  in  the  field  as  dark  bars.  Generally 
speaking  the  best  point  is  where  the  entire  field  is  seen 
and  its  margin  (diaphragm)  sharply  defined. 

What  Objects  to  Use.  Suitable  objects  for 
preliminary  work  in  leading  the  student  to  a  skillful 
use  of  the  instrument  and  to  give  him  proper  judgment 
in  testing  the  capacity  of  objectives  are  also  valuable. 

Low  Powers — Proboscis  of  blow-fly.  This  should 
be  flat  and  transparent.  For  i  inch,  2-3  and  1-2  inch 
objectives  the  scales  from  Lepisma  saccharina. 

132 


Medium  Powers — Pleurosigma  angulatum,  dry, 
stained  Bacteria  and  Micrococci. 

High  Powers — Oil  immersion  i-io  inch  and  1-12 
inch  objectives,  Amphipleura  peliucida,  Surirella  gemma 
in  balsam  or  sty  rax.  Stained  Bacteria  and  Micrococci. 

Test  Plate.  This  will  be  an  excellent  acquisition 
for  all  those  who  can  meet  the  pecuniary  outlay.  It 
consists  of  a  series  of  twenty  diatoms  arranged  accord- 
ing to  the  coarseness  of  the  lines.  They  are  furnished 
mounted  both  in  balsam  and  styrax.  Below  is  a  table 
giving  the  numbers,  names  of  the  various  diatoms  and 
divisions  on  their  surfaces  in  i-iooo  inch.  A  specimen 
of  Eupodiscus  argus  begins  and  ends  the  series : 

Striae  in  1-1000 
inch. 

1.  Triceratium  favus,  Ehrbg.,  3.1  to    4. 

2.  Pinnularia  nobilis,  Ehrbg.,  11.7   "  14. 

3.  Navicula  lyra,  Ehrbg.,  var.,  -  14.5   "  18. 

4.  Navicula  lyra,  Ehrbg.,    -  23.     u  30.5 

5.  Pinnularia  interrupta,  Sm.,  var.,  -  25.5   "  29.5 

6.  Stauroneis  phcenecenteron,  Ehrbg.,  31.     "  36.5 

7.  Grammatiphora  marina,  Sm.,  -  36.     "  39. 

8.  Pleurosigma  balticum,  Sm.,  32.     "  37. 

9.  Pleurosigma  acuminatum  (Kg.)  Grun.,  41.     u  46.5 
1.0.  Nitzchia  amphionys,  Sm.,  -  -  43.     "  49. 

11.  Pleurosigma  angulatum,  Sm.,  -  44.     "  49. 

12.  Grammatiphora  oceanica,   Ehrbg.,  G. 

subtilissima,  -  -  60.     "  67. 


13.  Surirella  gemma,  Ehrbg.,  43.  to  54. 

14.  Nitzchia  sigmoidea,  Sm.,    -  -  61.  "  64. 

15.  Pleurosigma  fascicola,  Sm.,  var..  55.  "   58. 

1 6.  Surirella  gemma,  Ehrbg.,  -  -  64.  "   69. 

17.  Cymatopleura  elliptica,  Breb.,  55.  kk   81. 

1 8.  Navicula  crassinervis,  Breb.,  Frustulia 

saxonica.  Rabh.,    -  -  78.  kt  87. 

19.  Nitzchia  curvula,  Sm.,    -  83.  "   90. 

20.  Amphipleura  pellucida,  Kg.,  -  92.  "95. 

Whatever  opinion  one  may  have  in  reference  to  the 
study  of  diatoms,  the  fact  cannot  be  gainsaid  that 
they  have  been  a  great  aid  in  the  improvement  of 
objectives.  They  are  used  by  opticians  to  judge  the 
various  characteristics  of  objectives  and  offer  a  reliable 
standard  for  testing  resolving  qualities,  such  as  no  other 
object  can.  The  writer  particularly  recommends  that 
the  test  Pleurosigma  angulatum,  dry,  form  a  part  of 
every  outfit,  not  only  as  a  test  for  resolving  power  but 
as  an  object  for  study  with  which  to  acquire  skill  in 
manipulating  the  microscope.  It  may  be  used  with 
powers  of  1-4  inch  and  higher  and  after  it  has  served 
its  purpose  may  be  put  aside  for  work  with  objects 
which  come  under  the  particular  branch  of  study  which 
one  is  following. 

The  writer  wishes  to  counteract  as  much  as  possible 
the  opinion,  which  is  too  prevalent,  that  the  use  of 
diatoms  indicates  microscopical  play  and  is  unworthy 
of  consideration  in  histological  and  biological  work ;  but 


the  fact  that  the  optician  deems  them  necessary  for 
determination  of  optical  qualities  ought  at  least  to 
indicate  that  they  are  a  valuable  adjunct  and  certainly 
will  aid  in  giving  greater  manipulative  skill. 

At  this  point  it  is  considered  advisable  to  add  some 
suggestions  from  Carpenter. 

"The  correctness  of  the  conclusions  which  the 
microscopist  will  draw  regarding  the  nature  of  any 
object  from  the  visual  appearence  which  it  presents  to 
him,  when  examined  in  the  various  modes  now  specified, 
will  necessarily  depend  in  a  great  degree  upon  his 
previous  experience  in  microscopical  observations  and 
upon  his  knowledge  of  the  class  of  bodies  to  which  the 
particular  specimen  may  belong.  Not  only  are  observa- 
tions of  any  kind  liable  to  certain  fallacies  arising  out 
of  the  previous  notions  which  the  observer  may  enter- 
tain in  regard  to  the  constitution  of  the  objects  or  the 
nature  of  the  actions  to  which  his  attention  is  directed, 
but  even  the  most  practiced  observer  is  apt  to  take  no 
note  of  such  phenomena  as  his  mind  is  not  prepared  to 
appreciate.  Errors  and  imperfections  of  this  kind  can 
only  be  corrected,  it  is  obvious,  by  general  advance  in 
scientific  knowledge;  but  the  history  of  them  affords 
a  useful  warning  against  hasty  conclusions  drawn  from 
a  too  cursory  examination.  The  suspension  of  the 
judgment,  whenever  there  seems  room  for  doubt,  is  a 
lesson  inculcated  by  all  those  philosophers  who  have 
gained  the  highest  repute  for  practical  wisdom,  and  it 


is  one  which  the  microscopist  cannot  too  soon  learn  or 
too  constantly  practice.  Besides  these  general  warn- 
ings, however,  certain  special  cautions  should  be  given 
to  the  young  microscopist  with  regard  to  errors  into 
which  he  is  liable  to  be  led  even  when  the  very  best 
instruments  are  employed." 

Medium  Power  Objective.  After  sufficient 
time  has  been  devoted  to  study  with  the  low  power 
objective,  exchange  it  for  the  higher  power  and  replace 
the  object  with  the  slide  Pleurosigma  angulatum. 
Focus  upon  this,  being  mindful  of  the  suggestions 
previously  given  and  do  not  fail  to  observe  what  has 
been  said  in  regard  to  well  illuminated  field.  Observe 
now  whether  any  lines  can  be  seen  upon  the  surface  of 
the  diatoms.  If  not,  vary  the  distance  of  the  mirror  from 
the  object,  if  adjustment  is  provided  for ;  or,  if  lamp- 
light is  used,  bring  the  lamp  closer  to  or  remove  it  from 
the  instrument  in  one  line  so  that  the  illumination  will 
not  disappear.  If  this  does  not  bring  out  the  lines, 
swing  the  mirror-bar  from  the  central  to  an  oblique 
position  on  the  side  opposite  to  that  of  the  light  and 
readjust  the  mirror.  Grasp  the  ends  of  the  mirror-fork 
between  the  thumb  and  middle  finger  and  move  the 
mirror  with  the  first  finger.  If  the  field  cannot  be  evenly 
illuminated,  it  is  evident  that  the  mirror  is  beyond  the 
limit  of  angular  aperture  of  the  objective  and  must 
therefore  be  brought  back  until  the  light  appears 

136 


equally  well  over  all  parts  of  the  field.  It  must  also 
be  noticed  here  that  if  the  diaphragm  is  still  attached 
to  the  instrument  and  does  not  swing  with  the  mirror, 
it  may  be  the  means  of  cutting  off  light.  The  largest 
opening  should  be  employed  or,  if  the  cap  diaphragm 
is  used,  »this  should  be  removed.  By  means  of  the 
micrometer  screw  carry  the  fine  adjustment  back  and 
forth  beyond  the  plane  of  the  object  and  observe 
closely  whether  any  lines  can  be  distinguished.  It  is 
very  probable  that  they  will  show,  but  if  not,  the  cause 
should  be  determined.  It  may  be  that  the  magnifying 
power  is  not  sufficiently  great  to  make  the  lines  visible 
and  in  this  case  a  higher  power  eyepiece  should  be 
used ;  or  the  cover  glass  may  be  more  or  less  than 
the  normal  thickness,  which  would  cause  a  spherical 
over-  or  under-correction  in  the  objective.  In  this 
case  the  lines  would  appear  when  the  outline  of  the 
diatom  is  out  of  focus,  and  the  structure  will  be 
more  readily  apparent  with  oblique  than  with  central 
light.  If  the  above  directions  have  been  followed,  the 
lines  ought  certainly  to  appear  with  a  moderately  good 
1-5,  1-6  or  1-8  inch  objective,  but  if  they  are  not,  the 
trial  should  be  repeated.  Again,  be  careful  to  have 
no  obstruction  in  the  course  of  rays  from  the  mirror 
to  the  stage ;  have  good  illumination  on  the  object ; 
observe  well,  and  keep  the  instrument  in  such  a  posi- 
tion that  the  object  is  not  illuminated  from  any  other 
direction  than  from  the  mirror. 


When  the  diatoms  are  resolved  in  this  manner  the 
lines  will  appear  to  be  diagonal  in  some,  longitudinal 
or  transverse  in  others,  according  to  their  position,  and 
if  the  resolution  is  very  good,  these  lines  will  further 
resolve  themselves  into  minute  beads  of  a  hexagonal 
form. 

It  will  now  be  well  to  bring  the  mirror  more  nearly 
to  a  central  position.  Do  this  by  intervals  of  about 
10  degrees  and  note  the  appearance  at  each  decrease 
of  obliquity.  It  will  be  found  that  as  the  mirror 
approaches  the  optical  axis  the  lines  will  appear  to 
become  more  faint  and  may  disappear  before  central 
illumination  is  reached ;  in  this  case  it  will  be  well  to 
begin  again.  An  endeavor  should  be  made  to  make 
each  attempt  give  better  results  than  the  preceding  one. 
Repeated  trials  will  not  only  impress  the  various 
phenomena  upon  the  mind,  but  will  cause  a  notable 
improvement  in  manipulative  skill  and  thus  a  better 
performance  in  the  objective. 

To  Judge  Spherical  Aberration.  This  is  a 
matter  of  experience  based  upon  the  knowledge  of  the 
principles  involved  and  after  having  been  studied  will 
be  found  to  be  of  the  utmost  value  in  utilizing  the 
capacity  of  a  microscope.  To  judge  sperical  aberration 
by  the  use  of  histological  or  biological  objects,  without 
a  previous  knowledge  acquired  from  objects  which  are 
more  suited,  is  extremely  difficult.  One  may  be  aware 

138 


by  the  unsatisfactory  appearance  of  the  image  that 
something  is  amiss,  but  will  probably  not  know  how 
to  correct  the  deficiency. 

Using  a  1-5,  1-6  or  1-8  inch  objective  and  the  test 
object  Pleurosigma  angulatum,  select  a  diatom  which 
is  flat  and  locate  in  the  center  of  the  field.  Focus  care- 
fully so  that  the  margin  of  the  object  will  be  sharply 
defined  and  observe  the  markings.  If  they  show  in 
the  same  plane  without  any  further  focusing,  the 
spherical  correction  may  be  accepted  as  being  correct. 
If  the  lines  appear  to  lie  in  a  higher  plane  and  it  is 
necessary  to  focus  upward,  so  that  the  margin  of  the 
diatom  is  out  of  focus,  it  indicates  spherical  over-correc- 
tion and  the  remedy  is  found  in  the  contraction  of  the 
tube  length.  This  should  be  done  progressively  in 
spaces  of  about  one-half  inch,  and  after  each  change 
carefully  focus  again  until  proper  correction  is  obtained. 

When  the  lines  appear  to  lie  below  the  plane  of  the 
object,  it  indicates  spherical  under-correction  and  can 
be  corrected  by  increasing  the  tube  length.  If  there 
are  two  or  more  eyepieces,  results  can  be  obtained 
quicker  with  the  higher  powers. 

If  the  markings  cannot  be  seen,  it  may  be  due  to 
abnormally  thick  or  thin  covers,  a  not  uncommon 
occurrence,  thus  destroying  the  resolving  power.  This 
may  be  judged  by  using  slightly  oblique  illumination. 
If  too  much  is  used  the  nice  differences  will  be  lost. 


'39 


In  all  objects  other  than  diatoms  it  is  generally 
difficult  to  form  an  opinion  as  to  spherical  correction. 
If  from  preconceived  idea  of  what  an  object  should 
show  it  fails  to  meet  expectations  or  is  hazy  where  one 
expects  it  to  be  distinct,  and  being  certain  that  the 
objective  and  eyepiece  are  properly  cleaned,  it  may 
generally  be  ascribed  to  lack  of  proper  correction.  By 
focusing  either  above  or  below  the  proper  focal  plane 
there  will  be  an  enlargement  of  the  outlines  of  the 
object  or  a  coma  which  gradually  enlarges  as  the  objec- 
tive recedes  from  the  proper  focal  point. 

If  the  expansion  is  greatest  when  the  objective  is 
elevated,  there  is  spherical  over-correction  and  the  tube 
length  should  be  decreased. 

Should  the  expansion  be  greatest  when  the  objective 
is  lowered,  there  is  spherical  under-correction  and  the 
tube  length  should  be  increased. 

Chromatic  Aberration.  This  may  be  judged 
as  described  under  "  Chromatic  Aberration"  in  a 
previous  chapter,  page  85. 

Cover  Glass.  We  have  thus  far  not  considered 
the  cover  glass,  except  to  show  its  influence  on  the 
optical  performance  of  objectives.  In  preliminary 
examinations  of  solid  objects  with  low  powers  it  may 
be  dispensed  with,  but  where  fluids  are  used,  whether 
with  low,  medium  or  high  powers,  it  should  always  be 

140 


used.  A  drop  or  small  quantity  of  fluid  placed  upon 
a  slide  assumes  a  spherical  form  and,  on  viewing  it 
with  a  low  power,  it  will  be  found  to  give  a  distorted 
field  and  cause  disagreeable  reflections  and  shadows. 

In  medium  and  high  powers,  the  front  lenses  will 
be  so  clcTse  to  the  water,  urine,  blood,  etc.,  that  capillary 
attraction  will  cause  an  adhesion  to  the  front  surface 
of  the  objective ;  besides  this,  there  is  such  a  consider- 
able depth  to  the  fluid  that  it  obstructs  the  light, 
requires  a  great  change  in  adjustment  for  the  various 
planes  and  is  usually  in  such  vibration  that  sharp  focus 
becomes  impossible.  By  merely  dropping  a  cover 
glass  upon  it  all  these  objections  are  overcome. 

Covers  are  commercially  classified  as  No.  i,  No.  2 
and  No.  3,  but  there  is  a  variation  within  the  limits  of 
different  numbers.  The  variation  is  about  as  follows  : 

No.  i,  1-150  to  1-200  inch,  or  o.i 6  to  0.13  mm.  thick. 
No.  2.  i-ioo  to  1-150  inch,  or  0.25  to  o.i 6  mm.  thick. 
No.  3,  1-50  to  i-ioo  inch,  or  0.50  to  0.26  mm.  thick. 

According  to  the  'prices  of  cover  glasses,  when 
purchased  by  weight,  the  No.  i  gives  the  greatest 
number  and  No.  3  the  least.  It  may  for  this  reason 
be  thought  that  the  purchase  of  No.  i  is  most  advant- 
ageous, but  it  must  be  considered  that  there  is  a 
greater  amount  of  breakage  by  cleaning,  as  they  are 
very  thin  and  sensitive.  Considered  from  the  optical 
standpoint  the  No.  2  covers  offer  a  range  in  thickness 

141 


to  meet  the  different  standards  as  used  by  the  makers 
of  objectives.  Test  objects  which  are  prepared  to  test 
the  resolving  power  of  objectives  and  consist  of  diatoms 
are  generally  covered  with  these  thicknesses.  The 
No.  i  are  principally  used  with  oil  immersion  objec- 
tives as  the  working  distance  of  these  objectives  is 
very  short  and  more  working  distance  is  gained  by 
using  thin  covers  with  them. 

An  excellent  means  of  determining  the  thickness  of 
cover  glass,  as  well  as  of  studying  spherical  and 
chromatic  aberration,  is  the  Abbe  test-plate.  This 
consists  of  a  series  of  cover  glasses  ranging  in  thickness 
from  0.09  mm.  to  0.24  mm.,  silvered  on  the  under 
surface,  with  lines  cut  through  the  film  of  silver,  and 
cemented  to  a  slide,  each  cover  being  marked  with  its 
correct  thickness. 

With  this  test-plate  spherical  aberration  is  corrected 
when  the  bands  or  lines  show  distinctly  without  any 
nebulous  fringe,  and  thus  indicate  the  proper  thickness 
of  cover  to  use. 

Chromatic  correction  may  be  judged  by  the  character 
of  color  bands  which  show  with  oblique  light.  But 
correction  is  indicated  when,  on  swinging  the  mirror  to 
the  left,  violet  appears  on  the  left  and  apple  green  on 
the  right  side  of  the  bands. 


142 


Dry,  Adjustable  Objectives.  Adjustable  objec- 
tives, or  objectives  with  collar  correction  are  those  in 
which  there  is  a  mechanical  provision  to  vary  the 
distance  between  the  lenses,  in  order  to  make  with 
facility,  proper  correction  for  spherical  aberration. 
They  involve  a  high  degree  of  mechanical  perfection 
and  are  therefore  more  expensive  than  objectives  with 
fixed  mountings.  They  may,  however,  be  recommended 
to  microscopists  who  have  acquired  some  experience 
in  handling  objectives  and  even  to  beginners  who  will 
use  judgment  in  their  use,  as  they  certainly  give  excel- 
lent results  and  quick  means  for  obtaining  the  utmost 
limit  of  efficiency  in  objectives,  a  fact  best  appreciated 
by  those  who  are  expert  in  the  use  of  them.  In  these 
objectives,  as  at  present  constructed  by  the  best 
makers,  a  milled  collar  is  provided,  which  when 
rotated  imparts  a  rectilinear  motion  to  an  interior  tube 
carrying  the  posterior  system  of  the  objectives,  thus 
varying  the  distance  between  them  and  the  front 
system  which  remains  stationary.  The  screw  collar  is 
graduated  in  such  a  manner  that  the  figures  indicate 
the  correct  point  for  the  proper  thickness  of  cover 
glass;  thus  10  indicates  proper  correction  for  a  cover 
of  o.io  mm.,  1 6  for  0.16  mm.,  and  so  on. 

When  set  for  thick  covers,  the  lenses  are  closest 
together  and  the  adjustment  is  said  to  be  closed :  when 
for  thin  covers,  the  lenses  are  farthest  apart  and  the 
adjustment  is  open. 

'43 


In  objectives  of  older  construction  and  in  some 
produced  at  the  present  day,  the  figures  are  abitrary 
and  serve  no  other  purpose  than  an  index  for  reference. 

Close  the  adjustment  before  attaching  the  objective 
as  its  front  may  otherwise  come  in  contact  with  the 
cover  before  the  focus  is  reached.  For  practice  with 
this  objective  use  P.  angulatum.  Focus  carefully  and 
observe  whether  any  lines  can  be  seen  ;  if  not,  grasp 
the  milled  edge  of  the  adjustment  collar  between  the 
thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  left  hand,  keeping  the 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  upon  the  milled  head  of  the 
fine  adjustment ;  turn  the  collar  slightly  toward  its 
open  point  and,  as  this  will  place  the  object  out  of 
focus,  move  the  fine  adjustment  correspondingly. 
Continue  to  turn  the  collar  little  by  little  and  do  not 
cease  to  observe  closely ;  also,  after  each  movement, 
focus  above  or  below  the  plane  of  the  object,  so  that 
this  will  be  distinct,  and  look  for  the  lines.  Possibly 
after  a  little  they  will  begin  to  appear  faintly ;  but, 
if  not,  continue  to  bring  the  collar  toward  the  middle 
point.  The  lines  must  now  soon  make  their  appear- 
ance, and  when  they  do,  it  will  probably  be  above  the 
plane  of  the  diatom.  This  is  an  indication  that  the 
objective  is  approaching  its  correction  for  the  cover. 
Now  keep  the  lines  in  focus,  while  the  correction  collar 
is  being  gradually  turned,  until  the  lines  and  the  outline 
of  the  diatom  lie  in  one  plane.  The  objective  is  now 
said  to  be  corrected  for  the  cover  used.  Observe 


144 


which  number  corresponds  to  the  index  and,  turning 
the  collar  back  to  its  closed  point,  go  through  the  same 
procedure  as  carefully  as  at  first.  When  the  best  point 
is  again  reached  look  for  the  number  and  see  whether 
it  agrees  with  the  first ;  very  likely  it  does  not,  which 
is  owing  to  a  lack  in  the  faculty  of  perception,  due  to 
a  too  slight  acquaintance  with  the  phenomena.  These 
trials  should  be  repeated  until  the  proper  sensitiveness 
of  feeling  in  making  the  adjustments  is  acquired  and 
until  they  can  be  made  to  correspond  with  certainty 
to  at  least  within  two  divisions.  When  it  is  found 
after  repeated  trials  that  sufficient  skill  has  been 
acquired,  mark  the  number  upon  the  slide.  For  future 
examination  of  the  same  slide,  this  will  facilitate  work 
and  give  the  assurance  that  the  best  results  are  thus 
obtained  without  further  trial  by  simply  referring  to  the 
recorded  number. 

On  stained  Bacteria  and  Micrococci  focus  briskly 
with  the  fine  adjustment  to  either  side  of  exact  focus. 
There  will  be  an  expansion  of  the  outline  of  the  object 
both  when  within  and  without  the  focus. 

If  the  greater  expansion  or  coma  is  within  the  focus, 
or  when  it  is  necessary  to  raise  the  objective,  there  is 
spherical  over-correction  and  the  adjustment  must  be 
closed. 

If  the  greater  expansion  is  below  the  focal  plane, 
there  is  sphericdl  under-correction  and  the  adjustment 
should  be  opened. 

145 


When  the  proper  point  of  correction  is  reached  the 
expansion  of  outline  is  the  same  in  both  directions. 

Immersion  Objectives.  As  has  been  stated 
before,  immersion  contact  between  the  objective  and 
cover  glass  is  made  with  either  water  or  homogeneous 
fluid.  With  the  former  distilled  water  only  should  be 
used  and  kept  in  a  suitable  bottle.  .Cedar  oil  is  used 
for  the  homogeneous  fluid  but  is  specially  prepared,  the 
commercial  cedar  oil  being  too  thin  and  volatile  and 
not  of  the  proper  refractive  index.  A  small  bottle  is 
generally  supplied  with  each  oil  immersion  objective. 
Great  care  should  be  used  in  keeping  it  free  from  dust, 
as  it  often  happens  that  an  objective  fails  to  give  satis- 
faction because  of  a  small  particle  of  dust  which  may 
float  in  the  fluid  in  front  of  the  hemisphere.  Great 
care  should  also  be  exercised  in  applying  oil  to  the 
front  lens  and  after  the  application  it  is  strongly 
recommended  to  examine  it  with  a  magnifier,  that 
there  may  be  no  air  bubbles  present.  Air  bubbles  as 
well  as  dust  seriously  interfere  with  obtaining  satis- 
factory results.  If  bubbles  are  present  the  oil  should 
be  removed  and  a  fresh  quantity  applied.  An  air 
bubble  will  entirely  destroy  the  clear  definition  of  a  lens 
even  when  not  directly  in  front  of  the  lens  itself.  Care 
should  also  be  taken  not  to  apply  too  great  a  quantity. 
After  the  stopper  has  been  withdrawn  from  the  oil, 
allow  the  oil  to  run  down  the  rod  or  brush  until  the 

146 


last  natural  drop  has  separated  from  it  and  apply  the 
remainder,  or  less  than  a  drop,  to  the  front  of  the 
objective. 

Attach  the  objective  and  lower  it  until  the  fluid 
comes  in  contact  with  the  cover,  observe  this  by  lower- 
ing the 'head  to  the  level  of  the  stage.  Focus  as  with 
dry  objectives.  The  use  of  immersion  fluid  in  itself 
involves  a  certain  amount  of  inconvenience,  but  the 
observance  of  fixed  rules  will  materially  help  to  over- 
come some  of  the  .  disagreeable  features.  Extreme 
cleanliness  should  be  observed  with  it.  After  the 
work  has  been  completed  the  objective  should  be 
removed  from  the  stand  and  its  front  as  well  as  the 
slide  should  invariably  be  cleaned.  The  fluid  may  be 
removed  by  a  moist  piece  of  soft  linen  and  the  front 
then  cleaned  with  a  dry  piece  or  with  lens  paper. 
Chamois  skin  is  not  suitable,  as  it  does  not  absorb 
the  fluid. 

Immersion  Objectives  on  Test    Plate.      Oil 

immersion  objectives  are  not  so  sensitive  to  variations 
in  thickness  of  cover,  although  many  of  the  most  expert 
manipulators  prefer  adjustable  mountings  in  order  to 
obtain  the  highest  results. 

To  determine  the  highest  capacity  on  test  objects, 
ordinary  daylight  is  not  sufficient ;  a  flat-wick  oil  lamp 
is  best  suited.  If  the  right  hand  is  used  on  micro- 
meter screw,  place  the  lamp  at  the  right  side  of  the 

147 


instrument,  about  ten  inches  from  it,  with  the  edge  of 
the  flame  turned  toward  the  mirror. 

Place  the  test  plate  upon  the  stage  and,  as  the 
diatoms  in  balsam  are  very  transparent  and  therefore 
very  difficult  to  find,  a  low  power  objective  may  be 
used  as  a  finder  ;  bring  No.  i,  Triceratium  favus,  into 
the  center  of  the  field  and  after  the  low  power  objective 
has  been  removed  attach  the  immersion  objective, 
which  we  assume  to  be  a  1-12,  in  the  manner 
prescribed.  Get  the  best  possible  illumination  with 
the  mirror  at  the  central  point  and  move  the  test  •  plate 
from  diatom  to  diatom  until  it  reaches  No.  n,  Pleuro- 
sigma  angulatum,  but  observe  closely  the  structure  of 
each  one  as  it  comes  into  the  field.  Next,  see  whether 
the  objective  is  spherically  corrected.  If  the  lines 
and  outlines,  or  middle  rib,  do  not  appear  to  be  in 
the  same  plane,  adjust  the  collar  in  adjustable  or 
the  tube  length  in  non-adjustable  objectives  until  they 
are,  then  continue  the  advance  toward  the  higher 
numbers  until  one  is  reached  on  which  no  lines  can 
be  seen.  Swing  the  mirror-bar  to  an  obliquity  of 
20  degrees  to  the  left  side  and,  readjusting  the  mirror, 
observe  the  effect.  It  is  very  probable  that  the 
lines  will  show  and  if  so,  continue  the  advance ;  if 
they  do  not,  increase  the  obliquity  of  the  mirror-bar 
10  degrees  or  20  degrees  and  after  the  structure 
comes  out,  again  go  forward.  A  ppint  may  thus  be 
reached  where  with  the  greatest  obliquity  which  can 

148 


be  given  and  with  the  best  possible  illumination  the 
objective  seems  to  have  come  to  the  limit  of  its  per- 
formance. From  the  claims  which  have  been  made 
for  it,  it  ought  to  do  better.  What  is  the  cause  of 
failure  ?  Possibly  the  mirror  is  not  correctly  focused, 
or  the  adjustment  collar  may  not  be  correct  for  oblique 
light ;  perhaps  the  eyepiece  does  not  give  sufficient 
magnifying  power  to  distinguish  the  striae.  It  may  be 
any  one  of  these  causes  or  all  combined.  As  to  the 
eyepiece,  the  manipulator  must  remember  the  amount 
of  separation  of  lines  in  the  last  object  which  was 
resolved  and  from  the  gradation  in  the  coarser  spec- 
imens must  judge  whether  the  power  is  sufficient ;  it 
should  be  added  that  for  any  over  No.  14  and  under 
No.  1 8  a  i  inch  eyepiece  should  be  used  and  for  those 
above  No.  18  a  power  of  3-4  inch  for  the  long 
tube  and  of  1-2  inch  for  the  short  tube  will  be 
necessary.  After  this  condition  has  been  complied 
with,  look  to  the  correction  collar  of  the  objective.  To 
obtain  the  highest  results  it  very  often  occurs  that  a 
different  adjustment  is  required  for  oblique  light  from 
that  for  central  light.  Note  the  number  at  which  the 
collar  stands  and  then  work  it  back  and  forth,  watching 
carefully  for  results.  If  this  has  no  influence,  return 
it  to  its  number  or  to  a  point  where  the  outline  of  the 
object  appears  most  sharp.  Now  look  to  the  illumina- 
tion ;  vary  the  distance  of  the  mirror  from  the  object, 
or  if  this  cannot  be  done,  vary  the  distance  of  the  lamp 


149 


from  the  instrument  and  watch  the  effect  of  the  change 
through  the  eyepiece.  If  neither  of  these  changes  give 
any  improvement,  recourse  must  be  had  to  another 
expedient.  Place  a  bull's-eye  between  the  lamp  and 
mirror  with  the  plane  side  of  the  lens  toward  the  lamp 
and  close  to  it,  so  that  the  light  is  thrown  on  the  mirror. 
It  should  be  properly  concentrated,  so  that  the  circle 
of  light  will  not  be  larger  than  the  mirror,  which  can 
be  determined  by  placing  the  hand  or  a  piece  of  paper 
back  of  it.  Adjust  when  necessary  by  moving  the 
lamp  or  bull's-eye.  Keep  the  mirror  a  little  below  the 
line  of  the  top  of  the  stage,  so  that  the  beam  from  the 
bull's-eye  will  not  illuminate  the  object  on  its  upper 
surface.  If  the  direct  light  from  the  bull's-eye  reaches 
the  object,  it  destroys  to  some  extent  the  effect  of 
the  oblique  illumination  from  the  mirror.  Great  care 
should  be  given  to  this  point  as  it  is  very  important. 

If  all  of  these  suggestions  have  been  followed,  a 
great  difference  will  undoubtedly  be  noticed  in  the 
performance  of  the  objective ;  but  if  it  still  does  not 
come  up  to  the  standard,  patience  must  not  be  lost. 
The  slightest  change  in  the  position  of  the  mirror,  or 
bull's-eye,  or  lamp,  or  a  touch  to  the  correction  collar 
or  micrometer  screw,  is  sometimes  followed  by  astonish- 
ing results.  The  beginner  should  sit  down  with  the 
expectation  that  he  will  fail  at  the  first  trial.  At  each 
succeeding  trial  he  can  easily  notice  his  improvement 
in  manipulation  and  a  corresponding  gain  in  the  results. 


He  should  be  able  to  bring  the  performance  of  the 
objective  up  to  the  claims  made  for  it,  if  it  has  come 
from  the  hands  of  a  reliable  optician,  and  should  not 
rest  until  this  is  accomplished. 

The  writer  has  often  recommended  sunlight  with 
generally  *  successful  results  where  ordinary  means  of 
illumination  have  failed.  The  light  is  of  course  intense 
and  great  care  will  have  to  be  used  to  modify  it  by 
properly  using  the  mirror,  but  success  is  often  attained 
and  then  creates  confidence.  It  is,  however,  only 
recommended  for  this  purpose  and  not  for  general  use. 

Stained  Bacteria  and  Micrococci  also  make  excel- 
lent objects  for  immersion  objectives.  The  mode  of 
illumination  is  the  same  as  with  dry  objectives.  Great 
care  and  judgment  should,  however,  be  exercised  in 
forming  an  opinion  as  to  resolving  power  from  such 
specimens.  Only  the  most  carefully  stained  and  suit- 
ably selected  specimens  are  of  any  value,  among  the 
best  of  which  may  be  mentioned  the  beaded  form  of 
Bacillus  tuberculosis,  if  clearly  and  deeply  stained. 
The  enveloping  structures  of  many  bacteria  and  the 
diffusion  of  stain  from  them  to  the  surrounding  sub- 
stances in  which  they  are  imbedded  render  them 
entirely  useless  for  test  purposes. 

Opaque  Objects  are  so  dense  in  their  structure 
that  the  light  from  the  mirror  below  the  stage  will  not 
pass  through  them.  They  generally  consist  of  plants, 
minerals,  shells,  etc. 


Place  the  object  on  a  slide  and  slip  under  the 
clips. 

In  this  case  the  low  power  objective  is  used 
for  two  reasons ;  because  a  general  view  is  sought, 
involving  low  magnification  and  large  field  with  light- 
giving  power  and  because  a  higher  power  cannot  be 
used  on  account  of  its  short  working  distance.  _The 
light  may  and  undoubtedly  will  be  found  insufficient  to 
distinguish  the  object  clearly.  If  the  instrument  is  of 
the  American  type,  swing  the  mirror-bar  upon  its  axis 

around  the  stage  to  a  point 
,,-.---"**  above  it  so  that  it  will  be 

at   an   angle  of    about  45 
~~~  degrees  to  its  surface.     If 

a  lamp   is  used  and  in  the 
-•"*  *-  same    position     as    when 

used  for  transmitted  light, 
it  is  probable  that  the  tube 
of     the    instrument     will 
^  "  '  *    obstruct  the  light  and  it  is 

Fig.  48.     Illuminating  Opaque  object    then    well    to    move    it    to- 
with  mirror  above  the  stage.  f  . 

ward  the  front.    Using  the 

concave  mirror,  adjust  so  that  the  light  will  be  con- 
centrated upon  the  object,  by  watching  it  directly,  and 
then  observe  through  the  tube.  If  it  is  not  sufficiently 
illuminated  continue  to  adjust  the  mirror;  also  vary 
its  distance  from  the  object  and  swing  the  mirror  bar 
to  a  higher  or  lower  point. 


In  the  Continental  form  of  microscope  where  there 
is  no  provision  for  swinging  or  placing  the  mirror  above 
the  stage,  one  is  dependent  upon  the  direct  source  of 
light  when,  in  the  case  of  lamp  light,  the  lamp  should 
be  raised  to  a  higher  position.  When  the  light  so 
obtained  is  not  sufficient  for  proper  examination, 
recourse  must  be  had  to  a  separate  apparatus,  the 
bull's-eye  condenser.  This  is  a  plane  convex  lens  of 
strong  curvature  fixed  to  a  stand  giving  adjustments  in 
different  directions.  It  is  interposed  between  the  light 
and  the  object,  with  its  plane  side  toward  the  object 
in  such  a  manner  that  the  lens  will  concentrate  the 
light  upon  its  upper  surface. 


'53 


ILLUMINATION    WITH    SUBSTAGE 
CONDENSER. 

Up  to  this -point  the  matter  of  illumination  has  been 
treated  in  its  most  simple  form  as  being  given  with 
mirror  only,  but  we  must  now  consider  the  substage 
condenser,  which  is  a  most  valuable  adjunct  to  the 
microscope.  While  skillfull  treatment  of  the  mirror 
only  will  go  far  toward  obtaining  good  results,  it  will 
not  suffice  except  in  the  most  simple  investigations. 

Purpose  of  the  Condenser.  The  purpose  of 
the  condenser  is  not  only  as  its  name  implies,  to  con- 
dense light,  and  thus  give  an  amply  illuminated  field 
when  the  illumination  is  otherwise  insufficient,  but  is 
more  especially  to  illuminate  the  object  with  a  cone  of 
light  having  an  angular  aperture  equal  to  that  of  the 
objective,  which  is  absolutely  unattainable  with  a  mirror 
only,  as  well  as  to  provide  means  for  controlling  the 
amount  and  character  of  the  illumination  to  suit  the 
various  conditions  of  work. 

Abbe  Condenser.  The  history  of  the  substage 
condenser  is  very  unique  and  interesting  and  shows 
how,  from  having  been  the  subject  of  no  end  of  con- 


demnation,  which  for  many  years  it  received,  it  is  now 
generally  accepted  as  a  necessary  adjunct  to  a  com- 
plete outfit,  should  in  fact  be  part  of  an  equipment  in 
which  there  is  a  medium  power  dry  or  an  oil  immersion 
objective.  From  single  lenses,  compound  and  achro- 
matic lenses,  the  use  of  eyepieces  and  objectives  as  con- 
densers and  any  number  of  devices  for  regulating  the 
light,  the  generally  accepted  forms  at  the  present  time 
have  come  to  be  those"  devised  by  Prof.  Abbe.  One  of 
them  with  a  'numerical  aperture  of  1.20  consists  of  a 
combination  of  two  lenses,  Fig.  49,  and  the  other  with 
an  aperture  of  1.42  of  three  lenses,  Fig.  50.  A  third 
is  made  achromatic  with  an  aperture  of  i.o.  It  is, 
hqwever,  considerably  more  expensive. 


Fig.  49.  Fig.  50. 

The  particularly  distinguishing  feature  of  these 
condensers  is  that  they  will  transmit  a  beam  of  light  as 
large  as  can  pass  within  the  limits  of  the  substage  ring. 

The  one  of  1.20  N.  A.  is  that  in  most  common  use 
as  it  meets  the  conditions  for  all  except  the  most 
critical  requirements. 

The  condensers  are  mounted  in  a  variety  of  forms 
offering  greater  or  less  facility  for  vertical  adjustment, 


the  amount  and  direction  of  light,  the  displacement  of 
condenser  when  it  is  not  used,  etc. 

The  most  simple  form,  largely  used  for  instruments 
for  laboratory  and  everyday  work,  is  one  which  has 
attached  to  its  lower  side  an  iris  diaphragm  for  regulat- 
ing the  amount  and  angle  of  light  and  to  which  is 
attached  a  swinging  arm  to  receive  blue  glass  for  use 
with  artificial  light,  or  stops  for  dark  ground  or  oblique 
illumination.  A  vertical  screw  motion  gives  a  service- 
able means  of  adjustment  and  when  at  its  lowrest  limit 
of  adjustment  it  may  be  swung  out  of  the  optical  axis. 

The  most  complete 
form  is  that  shown  in 
Fig.  5 1  a,  b  and  c,  .whfch 
has  adjustments  for  obtain- 
ing every  modification  and 
character  of  illumination, 
with  rack  and  pinion  for 
vertical  adjustment  and 
swinging  the  condenser 
and  iris  diaphragm  out  of 
the  way  if  it  is  not  desired 
to  use  them. 

The  condenser  should  not  be  used  on  very  low 
power  .objectives  as  it  is  distinctly  harmful  and  the 
mirror  alone  provides  ample  illumination. 

The  following  description  of  the  parts  of  the  com- 
plete substage  will  facilitate  its  use. 


Fig.  5  la.     Complete   Substage. 
Front  view. 


156 


The  Complete  Substage  consists  of  a  vertical 
bar  fixed  to  the  microscope  in  place  of  the  mirror  bar 
and  having  an  adjustable  slide  x  operated  by  rack 
and  pinion  a,  carrying  supporting  attachments  for  upper 
iris  diaphragm,  condenser  and  lower  iris  diaphragm 
respectively,  and  at  its  lower  end  the  plane  and  concave 
mirrors  m. 


s           1 

4 

,  r               d 

f 

Jft 

j  ^     C      ^ 

S 

_n_ 

r~ 

X 

1    1      V        n 

p     ' 

Q 

t 

m             g) 

Fig.   51b.     Complete   Substage.      Front  view,   with   condenser  and   lower 
iris  diaphragm  swung  out  of  optical  axis. 

The  Upper  Iris  Diaphragm  e  is  carried  in  the 
upper  substage  ring  s.  In  use  it  is  opened  and  closed 
V^y  the  lever  /  and  serves  to  regulate  the  amount  of  light 
when  an  object  is  viewed  without  the  condenser  and 
to  limit  the  volume  of  light  without  reducing  its  angle 
when  the  condenser  is  used  with  extremely  transparent 
objects,  such  as  unstained  bacteria,  moulds,  etc.  It  is 
raised  and  lowered  by  the  pinion  a  which  moves  the 
whole  substage. 


'57 


The  Condenser  c  is  carried  in  the  lower  substage 
ring  mounted  on  a  lateral  axis  by  which  it  may  be 
swung  to  the  left,  out  of  the  optical  axis.  It  has  a 
centering  adjustment  operated  by  the  milled  heads  n  n 
by  which  its  axis  can  be  made  to  correspond  with 
that  of  the  instrument  with  the  greatest  facility. 


Fig.  51c.     Complete  Substage.     Top  view,  with  condenser  and  lower    iris 
diaphragm  swung  out  of  optical  axis. 


The  Lower  Iris  Diaphragm  d  is  mounted 
on  the  plate  o  attached  to  a  lateral  axis  by  which  it  can 
be  swung  to  the  right  out  of  the  path  of  light  frcm  the 
mirror.  It  has  a  lateral  motion  by  the  rack  and  pinion  r  b 
on  the  plate  o  and  rotates  on  its  own  axis  so  that  when 
oblique  illumination  with  the  condenser  is  desired  a 
small  aperture  of  the  diaphragm  may  be  brought  the 
proper  distance  from  the  optical  axis  and  rotated  to 
bring  it  opposite  to  the  direction  from  which  the  light 

158 


comes  to  the  mirror  .or  at  right  angles  to  the  striae  of 
striated  structures.  The  diaphragm  d  is  operated  by 
the  lever  v. 

Use  only  plane  mirror  with  the  condenser. 

A  condenser  is  so  constructed  that,  parallel  rays 
of  lighfr  are  brought  to  a  focus  above  the  upper  surface 
of  its  uppermost  lens  and  in  the  plane  of  the  object, 
Fig.  52.  If  the  concave  mirror  is  used  the  convergence 
of  light  is  more  rapid  and  the  apex  of  the  cone  of  light 
is  within  the  condenser,  Fig.  53,  and  its  effectiveness 
depreciated. 


Fig.  52.     Illuminating  object  with  con- 
denser and  plane  mirror. 
The  right  way. 


Fig.  53.     Illuminating  object  with 

condenser  and  concave  mirror. 

The  wrong  way. 


Centering  the  Condenser  is  the  act  of  bringing 
its  optical  axis  coincident  with  the  optical  axis  of  the 
objective. 

In  the  simple  forms  of  microscopes  in  which  the 
work  is  not  critical,  the  condenser  as  sent  out  is 


sufficiently  centered  by  the  maker  for  all  ordinary 
requirements  but  there  should  be  provision  to  center 
it  in  case  of  disarrangement. 

In  the  more  complete  apparatus  adjustment  screws 
should  be  supplied.  These  provide  a  ready  means  of 
centering  and  when  once  the  correct  position  with  one 
objective  is  determined  it  will  not  require  any  further 
attention. 

To  verify  correct  centering  two  easy  methods  may 
be  followed : 

I.  Use  a   2   inch   objective  and  focus  through  the 
condenser  onto  the  diaphragm,  which   is  reduced  to  its 
smallest  opening. 

II.  Use    a  2-3    or  I   inch   objective;    focus    upon 
upper   surface    of  condenser    or   upon   an  object  which 
should  then   be  removed;    elevate  objective  with  coarse 
adjustment  until  a  dimly  defined  dark  spot  appears  in 
the  field  and  with  proper  focusing  is  about  i-j  of  the 
diameter  of  the  field. 

Centering  of  the  condenser  does  not  imply  that  the 
cone  of  illumination  is  also  centered  and  it  is  fully  as 
important  to  secure  the  correct  conditions  in  one  as  it 
is  in  the  other. 

Centering  the  Illumination.  The  mirror  may 
be  so  adjusted  that  the  light  will  be  directed  toward  the 
periphery  of  the  condenser  and  when  lamplight  is  used 

1 60 


the  light  may  be  so  placed,  as  to  give  all  gradations 
of  oblique  illumination  from  the  central  to  the  limit  of 
aperture,  although  the  condenser  may  be  centered ; 

With  daylight  have  evenly  illuminated  field. 

With  lamplight  attach  2-3  inch  objective;  open 
diaphrfigm  to  full  extent  and  focus  upon  the  minute 
image  of  flame;  adjust  mirror  so  that  the  image  will 
be  in  the  center  of  the  field. 

To  Focus  Condenser.  Since  the  condenser  is 
nothing  more  than  a  combination  of  lenses  similar  to 
those  in  an  objective,  but  used  in  a  reversed  position, 
it  has  the  same  properties  of  angular  aperture,  focus 
and  working  distance.  But,  as  it  must  work  through 
the  thickness  of  slide,  its  working  distance  is  propor- 
tionately long.  Owing  to  the  variation  in  thickness  of 
slides,  its  focus  falls  in  some  slides  above  and  in  others 
below  its  effective  position,  in  relation  to  the  object, 
and  an  adjustment  is  therefore  necessary  to  make  it 
most  effective. 

In  all  the  various  forms  of  mountings  the  condenser 
is  so  mounted  that  at  the  uppermost  limit  of  adjustment 
its  upper  surface  is  just  below  the  surface  of  the  stage 
so  that  it  cannot  come  in  contact  with  the  slide. 

With  all  objectives  having  a  numerical  aperture 
less  than  i.o  the  condenser  may  be  used  dry,  i.  e.  with- 
out oil. 

161 


In  the  use  of  the  condenser  with  oil  immersion  objec- 
tives the  custom  prevails  of  using  the  condenser  dry. 
It  is  convenient  especially  in  changing  specimens  and 
meets  the  requirements  of  every  day  work.  It  is  well 
to  point  out,  however,  that  both  the  condenser  and 
the  objective  lose  in  their  efficiency  when  the  former 
is  used  dry,  and  for  critical  work  the  condenser  should 
be  in  immersion  contact  with  the  slide. 

To  make  immersion  contact  between  condenser  and 
the  slide  place  a  drop  of  oil  on  the  top  of  condenser, 
drop  the  slide  upon  the  stage,  first  throwing  the  clips  to 
one  side. 

With  immersion  objectives  the  proper  focusing  of 
the  condenser  becomes  a  matter  of  nice  distinction  to 
obtain  best  results  and  can  only  be  reliably  accom- 
plished by  considerable  practice  and  experience. 
To  obtain  best  position  : 

Use  a  2-3  objective ;  focus  upon  the  object ;  adjust 
condenser  until  image  of  window-sash  or  flame  is  in 
the  same  plane  with  the  object. 

Relation  of  Aperture  of  Condenser  to 
Objective.  In  the  study  of  Bacteria  and  other  micro- 
organisms the  objectives  used  being  of  wide  aperture, 
it  is  sought  to  have  them  stand  out  boldly  in  a  bright 
field.  This  is  accomplished  by  bringing  the  diaphragm 
to  its  full  aperture.  On  all  other  objects,  however, 

162 


too  much  illumination  decidedly  injures  definition  by 
obliterating  detail. 

Little  experience  is  required  to  judge  when  the 
condenser  has  its  proper  opening.  When  correct,  the 
image  will  stand  out  sharply  defined  without  any 
appearance  of  fogginess  and  as  the  diaphragm  aperture 
is  reduced  it  will  be  noticeable  by  the  decrease  in  the 
amount  of  light.  By  removing  the  eyepiece  and 
looking  at  the  back  of  the  objective  the  relative  aper- 
ture of  the  condenser  to  that  of  the  objective  may  be 
easily  seen,  as  the  outlines  of  the  diaphragm  are 
sharply  defined.  In  testing  for  this,  start  with  the 
smallest  aperture  of  the  diaphragm  and  gradually 
increase  its  diameter.  If  the  opening  in  diaphragm 
appears  to  have  the  same  opening  as  the  back  of 
objective,  the  condenser  has  the  same  angular  aper- 
ture. In  the  following  instructions  for  the  proper  use 
of  light  from  the  condenser  the  size  of  opening  of  its 
diaphragm  as  it  appears  by  viewing  the  back  of  the 
objective  is  called  apparent  aperture.  By  experience 
the  following  conditions  have  been  found  to  give  most 
satisfactory  results  : 

With   oil  immersion  objectives  on  bacteria  use  the 
full  opening  of  diaphragm. 

For  diatoms  reduce  the  apparent  aperture  to  about 
two -thirds  opening  in  objective. 


For  histological  and  other  dense  objects  the  apparent 
aperture  should  be  equal  to  about  one-half  the  opening 
of  back  lens  in  objective. 

With  dry  objectives  the  aperture  of  the  condenser 
should  always  be  less  than  that  of  the  objective, 

Oblique  Light  with  Condenser.  Oblique  light 
may  be  obtained  by  setting  the  mirror  alone  in  such  a 
position  that  the  light  reflected  from  it  shall  enter  the 
condenser  only  at  one  side,  leaving  the  balance  of  it 
unused.  This,  however,  is  only  advisable  when  the 
condenser  mounting  has  no  other  provision  for  obtaining 
oblique  light.  In  the  mountings  having  such  provision 
oblique  illumination  may  be  obtained  by  two  methods : 

/.    Focus  objective;  reduce 
the  apparent  aperture  to  that 
of  the  rear  lens  of  the  objective, 
swing  the  plate  o,   Fig.  51  a, 
carrying   the    lateral  adjust- 
ment around  so  that  the  pinion 
button  is  at  the  front.      Turn 
the  pinion  button  so  that  the 
opening  will   move  from  the 
center  to  the  periphery  of  the 
condenser,  Fig.  54. 
II.     Proceed  as  above  with  this  difference:    Remove 
eyepiece  and  view  the  bright  circle  of  light  as  it  passes 
from  the  center  to  the  periphery  of  the  rear  lens. 


Fig.  54.     Illuminating  object  by 
oblique  light  with  condenser. 


164 


When  the  circle  of  light  has  passed  beyond  the 
limit  of  aperture  of  the  objective  the  field  will  become 
dark.  The  amount  of  illumination  may  be  modified, 
but  in  a  general  way  it  may  be  said  that  the  best 
results  with  oblique  illumination  are  obtained  by 
reducing  the  amount  of  illumination  to  its  minimum 
practicable  amount. 

In  objects  with  striated  structure,  the  illuminating 
rays  should  be  brought  to  a  position  at  right  angles 
to  the  striae,  either  by  rotating  the  object  to  the  proper 
position,  or  by  swinging  the  diaphragm  plate. 

In  using  process  II  the  circle  of  light  should  be 
bright.  As  it  nears  the  edge,  colors  become  apparent 
until  finally  at  the  edge  of  the  objective  the  violet 
and  red  are  quite  pronounced.  With  proper  disposi- 
tion of  the  mirror  the  colors  may  be  so  equalized 
that  after  a  little  practice  the  illumination  will  be  found 
at  its  best  after  the  eyepiece  is  applied. 

With  either  method  lamplight  will  be  found  to 
give  best  results  but  care  must  be  taken  that,  as  the 
diaphragm  passes  toward  the  oblique  point,  the  mirror 
is  also  turned  so  that  the  illumination  will  not  be  lost. 

In  the  Abbe  condensers  the  chromatic  aberrations 
are  quite  apparent  with  extreme  oblique  illumination — 
more  so  with  that  of  1.40  N.  A.  than  with  1.20  N.  A. 
The  field  ceases  to  be  equally  illuminated  and  all  the 
colors  of  the  spectrum  from  the  violet  to  the  red  are 

165 


plainly  evident  within  the  field  of  view.  Under  these 
conditions  it  is  of  course  impossible  to  view  large 
specimens  without  slightly  shifting  the  mirror  so  as  to 
move  the  lightest  portions  of  the  spectrum  to  different 
parts  of  the  field.  With  small  specimens  the  mirror 
should  be  so  directed  that  the  light  or  yellow  portion 
of  the  spectrum  is  in  the  middle  of  the  field. 


166 


HOW  TO  DRAW  OBJECTS. 

t 

To  be  able  to  make  a  correct  drawing  of  the 
enlarged  image  of  an  object  is  very  important  and 
while  for  some  lines  of  work  the  photographic  camera 
is  called  into  use,  drawings  are  nevertheless  largely 
relied  upon.  The  apparatus  requisite  for  this  purpose 
is  the  camera  lucida  and  while  there  is  a  variety  of 
forms,  all  are  based  upon  the  principle  of  causing  the 
image  of  the  object  to  appear  projected  upon  the 
paper,  where  it  may  be  drawn. 

The  image  of  the  object,  the  paper  and  the  pencil 
point  are  viewed  at  the  same  time  and,  with  proper 
regulation  of  light,  are  equally  distinct.  The  micro- 
scope image  seems  to  be  projected 
upon  the  paper  and  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  draw  the  outlines  and  fill  out 
details  to  obtain  an  exact  picture  of  it. 

The    most    simple    form    is    that 
shown    in    Fig.    55.      With    this    the  p.     55 

microscope    must   be    inclined    to    a 
horizontal  position  or  nearly  so  and  the  camera  lucida 
attached  to  the  eyepiece.     The  pencil  of  light  from  the 


microscope  is  reflected  by  the  thin  film  of  glass  into 
the  eye  and  the  image  is  apparently  projected  beyond 
the  glass  upon  the  paper  where  the  pencil  point  may 
trace  out  its  details. 

The  best  form  and  that  which  has  nearly  superceded 
all  others  which  have  made  pretense  to  giving  good 
results  is  the  Abbe  camera  lucida,  Fig.  56. 

While  in  the  original  construction  it  gave  superior 
results  it  has  been  gradually  improved,  so  that  in  its 


Fig.  56. 

complete  state  it  leaves  nothing  to  be  desired.  Its 
price  is  necessarily  high  but  it  is  also  offered  in  simpli- 
fied form  to  meet  more  modest  demands  and  will  with 
proper  use  do  very  good  work  although  not  as  good 
nor  with  equal  facility  as  the  more  complete. 

The  optical  construction,  Fig.  57,  is  the  same  in  all 
forms.  Two  1-4  inch  rectangular  prisms  of  which  one 
has  a  silvered  diagonal  surface  with  a  central  opening  of 
one  half  the  diameter  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  are  cemented 

1 68 


together  at  their  diagonal  surfaces,  thus  forming  a 
cube.  At  one  side  of  the  cube  about  3  inches  from 
it  is  a  mirror  set  at  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees. 
The  optical  parts  are  mounted  in  various  degrees  of 
mechanical  completeness  to  be  clamped  to  the  tube  in 
such  a  manner  that  the  glass  cube  is  situated  above 
the  eye  l£ns. 


Fig.  57.     Optical  construction  of  Abbe  camera  lucida. 

A  very  simple  form  is  one  with  a  small  fixed  mirror 
near  the  tube  and  arranged  to  swing  out  so  that  the 
eyepiece  is  unobstructed. 

Another  form  has  large  mirror  which  is  adjustable 
in  its  inclination  to  the  table  and  distance  from  the  eye- 
piece. This  form  is  provided  with  dark  glass  discs  at 
the  side  and  below  the  prism  to  control  the  amount  of 
illumination  from  the  object  and  the  paper.  The  best 
form  gives  full  control  of  the  mirror,  has  rotating  discs 

169 


carrying  a  series  of  dark  glasses  of  different  shades, 
has  centering  arrangement  to  bring  the  opening  of  the 
cube  into  the  optical  axis  and  swings  out  so  that  the 
object  can  be  viewed  without  disturbing  the  camera 
lucida. 

To  obtain  satisfactory  results  with  any  camera 
lucida  several  fundamental  rules  must  be  observed : 

Use  sharp  pencil  point.     If  spectacles  are  necessary 
o  read  they  must  be  used  with  the  comer  a  lucida  to  see 
the  pencil  point. 

The  light  in  the  field  of  view  and  from  the  drawing 
surface  should  be  of  about  the  same  intensity. 

The  drawing  surface  should  be  at  right  angles  to 
the  axis  of  the  projected  image,  otherwise  there  will  be 
an  elongated  picture  and  distortion  at  one  end. 

Draw   the  outline  of  the  image    and   indicate  the 

details    of  structure    in    light   lines    and  complete  the 

drawing  without  the  camera  lucida  by  reference  to  the 
microscope. 

Illumination.  The  relative  illumination  of  the 
field  in  the  eyepiece  and  drawing  paper  varies  with  the 
magnifying  power  and  distance  of  paper  from  the  eye- 
piece. The  control  of  the  illumination  in  the  better 
class  of  camera  lucidas  provided  with  glass  shades  is 
comparatively  easy,  but  in  the  simple  forms  several 
expedients  must  be  resorted  to. 

170 


With  low  power  objectives  the  light  in  the  field  in 
the  eyepiece  is  stronger  than  that  from  the  paper.  It 
may  be  modified 

by  using  plane  mirror, 

by  covering  the  mirror  with  tissue  paper, 

by  using  a  small  opening  of  the  substage  diaphragm. 

With  the  higher  powers  the  conditions  are  reversed 
and  the  field  of  the  paper  appears  brighter  than  that 
in  the  eyepiece. 

In  this  case  reduce  the  light  on  the  paper  by  using 
a  tissue  paper  or  opaque  screen. 

Use  substage  condenser  and  modify  light  with  the 
iris  diaphragm. 

Arrangement  of  Drawing  Surface.  As  has 
been  stated  this  should  be  at  right  angles  to  the  axis 
of  the  projected  image.  In  all  camera  lucidas  the 
reflecting  mirror  is  quite  close  to  the  tube  of  the 
microscope  which  is  supposed  to  be  in  upright  position 
and  if  set  so  that  the  axis  of  the  cone  of  projected  rays 
is  vertical,  there  will  be  no  distortion,  or  in  other  words 
the  field  of  view  will  be  perfectly  circular.  It  will 
be  found,  however,  that  the  stage  and  base  of  the 
microscope  will  project  within  this  circle  and  so 
prevent  obtaining  a  complete  drawing  of  the  object. 
The  mirror  of  the  camera  lucida  must  therefore  be  so 
tilted  as  to  throw  the  cone  of  rays  farther  away  from  the 

171 


microscope  which  would  form  an  elongated  or  distorted 
image  and  to  correct  this  the  drawing  surface  must  be 
sufficiently  tilted  to  bring  it  at  right  angles  to  the  axial 
ray.  An  easy  method  to  determine  whether  the  surface 
is  at  a  right  angle  is  to  mark  the  outlines  of  the  field  of 
view  on  the  paper  at  the  right  and  left  and  at  the  front 
and  back  extremes  and  measure  the  distance.  The 
surface  should  be  so  tilted  that  the  distance  in  both 
directions  is  the  same. 

If  the  microscope  is  tilted  another  complication 
arises  inasmuch  as  the  drawing  surface  must  be  tilted 
with  it. 

Field  and  Magnification.  The  size  of  the 
drawing  of  an  object  depends  upon 

the  initial  magnification  of  the  microscope, 
the  distance  of  the  drawing  from  the  eyepiece. 

Drawings  should  be  made  with  such  objectives  and 
eyepieces  as  would  be  used  to  examine  structure.  As 
the  distance  of  the  drawifig  surface  from  the  eyepiece 
is  increased  the  image  becomes  larger.  The  size  of 
drawing  must  therefore  be  regulated  by  varying  the 
height  of  the  drawing  surface. 

To  Use  the  Simple  Camera  Lucida.  Focus 
the  objective  upon  the  object ;  incline  microscope  to  the 
horizontal  position,  raise  microscope  by  underlaying  with 
blocks  or  books,  readjust  mirror  and  attach  camera 

172 


lucida,  place  paper  upon  the  table  or  board,  view 
through  camera  lucida  for  correct  position  and  fasten 
with  drawing  tacks ;  modify  light  so  that  image  and 
pencil  point  are  equally  distinct. 

Use  of  the  Abbe  Camera  Lucida.  Care  must 
be  observed  in  attaching  this  to  the  'microscope  tube. 
The  opening  in  the  silvered  surface  of  the  glass  cube 
must  be  so  placed  that  it  will  be  coincident  with  the 
focal  point  and  axis  of  the  eyepiece.  If  too  high  or 
low  the  field  will  be  reduced  or  one  side  of  the  field 
will  be  cut  off. 

Focus  upon  object ;  attach  camera  lucida  and  adjust 
so  that  field  is  round  and  not  cut  off. 

Place  drawing  board  with  paper  attached  at  right 
hand  side  of  microscope ;  look  into  camera  lucida  and 
adjust  reflecting  mirror ;  place  paper  in  proper  position 
and  tilt  board  to  proper  inclination  ;  place  pencil  upon 
the  paper  and  regulate  light  from  both  fields  until  image 
and  pencil  are  equally  distinct. 

To  Measure  the  Amount    of  Enlargement. 

This  is  accomplished  by  means  of  a  stage  micrometer 
(which  as  has  already  been  stated  consists  of  a  very 
fine  scale  which  is  ruled  upon  the  glass  slide)  after  the 
drawing  is  made. 

Remove  the  object  and  replace  with  stage  micrometer. 
Place  so  that  one  of  the  lines  coincides  with  the  outline 


of  the  image  at  one  side  and  indicate  each  line  of  the 
micrometer  on  the  drawing  until  the  outline  at  the 
opposite  side  is  reached.  The  computation  is  made  by 
dividing  the  diameter  of  the  drawing  by  the  value  of  a 
division  of  micrometer  multiplied  by  the  number  of 
divisions  which  are  projected  on  the  drawing.  Thus 
if  the  ruling  on  the  micrometer  is  o.oi  mm.  and  10 
divisions  cover  the  outline  of  the  drawing,  while  the 
actual  measurement  of  the  drawing  is  30.0  mm.  the 
formula  would  be3o-^-(i-ioox  10)  =  300. 

If  a  standard  of  10  inches  is  maintained  in  all 
drawings  and  the  amount  of  magnification  with  certain 
objectives  and  eyepieces  be  previously  determined  by 
means  of  the  micrometer,  a  standard  is  established  for 
each  and  further  measurement  will  not  be  required. 
If,  however,  variations  from  this  standard  distance  are 
made,  the  actual  magnification  should  always  be 
determined. 

The  magnification  is  sensitive  to  slight  variations 
in  the  distance.  The  standard  distance  of  10  inches 
is  determined  by  measuring  from  the  optical  axis  of 
the  microscope  to  the  axis  of  the  mirror  of  the  camera 
lucida  and  from  this  to  the  drawing  surface. 

Drawing  Table.  It  will  be  noticed  that  great 
stress  has  been  laid  upon  the  fact  of  keeping  the  draw- 
ing surface  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  projecting 
cone  of  rays  and  that  the  drawing  board  must  be  tilted 


to  accomplish  this.  In  order  to  maintain  a  standard 
distance  of  10  inches  or  to  vary  this  distance  to  meet 
requirements  the  drawing  surface  must  be  raised  or 
lowered.  This  can  only  be  done  by  blocks  or  books 
and  the  tilting  by  underlaying  or  by  cutting  a  block 
with  properly  inclined  surface,  which,  however,  is  fixed 
in  height.  All  of  these  methods  are  crude  and  cumber- 
some and  easily  liable  to  derangement.  An  excellent 
substitute  is  offered  in  the  drawing  table,  Fig.  58, 


Fig.  58. 

which  while  simple  in  construction  and  inexpensive  is 
very  serviceable.  Upon  its  base,  the  upper  part  of 
which  is  hinged,  the  microscope  is  clamped.  The 
drawing  board  is  fastened  to  a  hinged  attachment  which 
is  adjustable  for  height.  The  pawl  at  the  right  provides 
the  necessary  amount  of  inclination  and  the  extent  of 
this  is  indicated  by  a  quadrant  at  the  hinge.  An  arm 
rest  is  provided  which  may  be  moved  along  the  front. 


To  Determine  Magnifying  Power.  While 
the  magnifying  power  may  be  known  from  tables 
accompanying  the  microscope,  these  are  only  approx- 
imate, as  there  is  more  or  less  variation  in  eyepieces 
and  objectives  and  furthermore  the  microscope  may  be 
used  under  different  conditions  from  those  under  which 
the  original  determinations  were  made. 

To  determine  magnifying  power  three  requisites 
are  necessary : 

A  camera  lucida. 

A  stage  micrometer  ruled  in  divisions  of  inches  or 
millimeters. 

A  pocket  or  foot  rule  in  inches  or  millimeters, 
according  to  the  stage  micrometer  which  is  used. 

The  stage  micrometer  is  a  glass  slip  having  a  very 
fine  scale  ruled  upon  it.  The  lines  are  often  so  fine  as 
to  be  nearly  invisible  except  under  the  microscope. 

Place  the  stage  micrometer  with  divisions  ofo.oi  mm. 
upon  the  stage  and  focus.  Attach  the  camera  lucida, 
place  the  microscope  in  exactly  the  same  position  as  for 
drawing,  maintaining  the  standard  distance  of  10  inches 
from  optical  axis  to  drawing  paper ;  mark  the  spaces 
of  the  micrometer  as  projected  upon  the  paper  and 
determine  how  many  of  the  divisions  of  the  rule  are 
contained  within  one  or  more  spaces  on  the  paper.  If 
the  values  are  in  millimeters  and  it  should  be  found 
that  25.0  mm.  on  the  rule  are  contained  in  one  space 


on  the  paper,  the  magnification  would  be  2500.  If  18.6 
on  the  rule  are  contained  within  three  spaces  on  the 
paper,  the  magnification  would  be  620  times. 

To  Measure  the  Size  of  an  Object.  One  of 
the  most  valuable  possibilities  of  the  microscope  is  to  be 
able  to  accurately  measure  the  actual  size  of  a  minute 
object.  Computations  may  be  made  in  inches  or  milli- 
meters by  figuring  25.4  mm.  equal  to  i  inch.  It  may 
be  done  by  several  methods,  either  of  the  following 
being  generally  employed  : 

The  first  of  these  gives  satisfactory  results  on 
coarser  objects  and  wherever  the  most  accurate  results 
are  not  required,  although  it  is  somewhat  inconvenient. 
The  requisites  are  : 

A  camera  lucida. 
A  stage  micrometer. 

The  object  is  placed  upon  the  stage  and  after 
focusing,  the  camera  lucida  is  attached  and  the  instru- 
ment set  up  exactly  as  for  drawing.  On  the  drawing 
paper  the  outlines  of  object,  or  those  portions  which  are 
to  be  measured,  are  marked.  Without  in  the  least  dis- 
turbing any  of  the  conditions  of  tube  length  or  distance 
from  the  paper,  remove  the  object  and  replace  it  by  the 
stage  micrometer,  focusing  only  with  the  fine  adjust- 
ment and,  it  may  be  added,  there  should  be  very  little 
variation  in  thickness  between  the  two  slides.  Move 


177 


the  micrometer  so  that  one  of  its  .lines  shall  exactly 
coincide  with  one  end  of  the  drawing  on  the  paper  and 
then  measure  off  how  many  spaces  are  covered  by 
the  object.  Thus  if  o.ooi  inch  is  the  value  of  the 
micrometer  spaces  and  the  object  covers  one  space, 
its  size  will  be  o.ooi  inch,  or  covering  seven  spaces 
will  be  0.007  mch. 

A  variation  of  the  distance  of  the  camera  lucida 
from  the  paper,  or  a  change  of  power  in  eyepiece  or 
objective  does  not  vary  the  results  so  long  as  object 
and  micrometer  are  used  under  exactly  the  same 
conditions. 

The  second  method  is  with  the  eyepiece  micrometer 
or  micrometer  eyepiece.  The  eyepiece  micrometer 
consists  of  a  circular  disc  of  glass  of  suitable  size  to 
just  fit  inside  the  tube  of  the  eyepiece,  resting  upon  the 
diaphragm  at  the  focus  of  the  eye  lens,  scale  side  up, 
or  mounted  in  an  oblong  holder  to  be  slipped  into  a 
slot  in  the  eyepiece  mounting  just  above  the  diaphragm. 
In  case  the  lines  on  the  eyepiece  micrometer  do  not 
show  plainly,  adjust  the  eye  lens  until  they  do.  The 
micrometer  eyepiece,  Fig.  45,  in  which  the  eyepiece 
and  micrometer  form  a  complete  apparatus  and  a 
lateral  adjustment  of  the  scale  across  the  field  is  given 
by  a  screw,  is  much  more  convenient. 

In  either  of  these  forms  the  ruled  lines  appear  to 
lie  directly  on  the  image  of  the  object,  but  while  we 


have  on  the  one  hand  the  actual  value  of  the  micro- 
meter we  have  on  the  other  only  the  image  of  the 
object.  The  value  of  the  eyepiece  micrometer  in  the 
value  of  the  stage  micrometer  must  be  first  determined. 
While  the  optician  can  do  this,  it  should  be  done  by 
the  manipulator  on  account  of  the  varying  conditions 
of  tube  length,  power  of  objective,  etc.  A  stage  micro- 
meter ruled  in  the  same  values  as  the  eyepiece  micro- 
meter is  necessary. 

Focus  the  eye  lens 
on  the  eyepiece  micro- 
meter and  the  objec- 
tive on  the  stage  mi- 
crometer, being  care- 
ful to  bring  the  first 
line  of  the  former 
coincident  with  a  line 
of  the  latter,  using 
care  to  see  that  they 
are  parallel.  As  the 
lines  of  the  stage  mi- 
crometer will  appear 
to  hare  a  certain 

amount  of  thickness,  make  the  first  line  of  the  eye- 
piece micrometer  correspond  with  one  edge  of  a  line  on 
the  other.  Now  read  off  how  many  of  the  lines  are 
contained  in  one  space  of  the  stage  micrometer  and  note 
this.  We  will  assume  that  there  are  eight  divisions. 


The  eyepiece  micrometer  compared  with  the 
stage  micrometer. 


I79 


Replace  the  stage  micrometer  by  the  object  to  be 
measured  and  bring  one  edge  of  the  object  coincident 
with  the  first  line  of  the  eyepiece  micrometer,  being  care- 
ful to  leave  all  the  conditions  unchanged.  Note  how 
many  divisions  are  required  to  cover  the  object  and 
divide  by  the  figure  first  obtained  with  the  stage  micro- 
meter. 

Thus  if  an  object 
covers  forty  spaces 
of  the  eyepiece  mi- 
crometer its  real  size 
will  be  (40  ™  8)  x 
o.oi  mm.  =  0.05 
mm. 

If  measurements 
are  made  under  ex- 
actly the  same  condi- 
tions of  tube  length, 
with  same  objectives, 
it  will  be  unneces- 
sary to  repeat  the 

operation  with  eyepiece  and  stage  micrometer,  as  the 
ratio  remains  constant  and  maybe  marked  on  a  card 
for  reference. 

The  most  efficient  apparatus,  however,  for  obtaining 
accurate  results  is  theyf/^r  or  screw  micrometer,  Fig.  59. 
This  consists  of  a  metal  case  to  the  upper  surface  of 


Measuring  an   object  with   the    eyepiece 
micrometer. 


180 


which  is  fitted  an  adjustable  Ramsden  eyepiece.  Within 
is  a  frame  carrying  one  or  several  delicate  spider  lines, 
which  are  moved  across  the  space  to  be  measured  by 


Fig.  59. 


an  accurate  screw  of  either  0.5  mm.  or  1-50  inch  pitch, 
which  has  at  its  end  a  graduated  disc  divided  in  100 
or  more  spaces,  thus  giving  a  definite  value  for  each 


Field  of  Filar  Micrometer. 


space.     An  adapter  is  also  provided  for  attaching  to 
the  tube  of  the  microscope. 

181 


TO  SELECT  A  MICROSCOPE. 


When  one  has  concluded  to  obtain  a  microscope, 
a  suitable  selection  is  a  matter  of  considerable  import- 
ance to  him.  The  varieties  are  innumerable,  prices 
without  end,  all  sorts  of  claims  made  for  them. 

The  variety  of  special  lines  of  investigation  involves 
nearly  as  great  a  variety  of  requirements.  The  amount 
of  money  to  be  expended ;  what  shall  be  the  stand ; 
what  the  objectives  ;  shall  the  entire  outfit  be  purchased 
at  one  time  or  little  by  little ;  are  all  questions  of  par- 
amount importance  which  the  writer  does  not  expect 
to  solve,  but  hopes  to  give  sufficient  information  so  that 
a  more  intelligent  selection  may  be  made  than  might 
probably  be  done  otherwise. 

If  one  has  a  friend  or  teacher,  who  is  generally 
accepted  as  an  authority,  it  will  be  well  to  consult  him 
or  her  and  obtain  suggestions  as  to  the  most  suitable 
selection  for  the  intended  work,  and  such  advice  will 
always  be  gladly  given.  Or,  if  advice  is  asked  of  a 
reputable  manufacturer,  the  writer  is  convinced  that  it 
will  be  honestly  and  disinterestedly  given. 

182 


When  means  will  permit,  the  outfit  for  immediate 
requirements  should  be  obtained  complete  and  as 
Prof.  Gage  says,  "  the  best  that  can  be  afforded  should 
be  obtained,"  and  further,  "  even  when  all  the  optical 
parts  cannot  be  obtained  in  the  beginning  it  is  wise  to 
secure  a  stand  upon  which  they  may  all  be  used  when 
they  are  finally  secured."  The  writer  agrees  entirely 
with  this  advice.  Even  though  the  stand  be  plain,  it 
should  be  good,  with  the  necessary  adjustments  and 
capable  of  receiving  and  fully  utilizing  such  further 
accessories  as  may  be  obtained  later  on. 

Stand.  While  one's  sense  of  the  aesthetic  may  be 
a  factor  it  is  mainly  the  practical  utility  which  must 
govern  the  decision.  \Vhether  large  or  small  must 
largely  be  determined  by  the  future  use  to  which  it  is  to 
be  put.  One  rule  may  apply  to  all,  however,  and  that 
is,  that  the  instrument  shall  be  so  balanced  that  it  will 
be  absolutely  steady  during  manipulation  in  the  upright 
or  inclined  position.  In  general  the  low  Continental 
stand  is  preferred  as  it  permits  of  resting  the  arms 
upon  the  table  while  moving  the  object  and  a  more 
comfortable  position  while  looking  through  the  tube 
whether  the  instrument  be  upright  or  inclined. 

Tube  Length.  In. the  matter  of  tube  length  the 
optical  results  are  the  same  in  both,  so  that  tube  length 
must  be  considered  only  in  so  far  as  it  affects  the 

183 


height  of  the   instrument.     The  short  tube   length  of 
1 60.0  mm.  is  at  the  present  time  in  general  use. 

Base.  The  base  is  an  important  feature  and  while 
it  should  not  be  over  heavy,  should  insure  steadiness 
by  the  proper  form  and  disposition  of  metal ;  it  should 
not  rest  on  more  than  three  points,  with  the  rear  one 
fairly  distant  from  the  pillar. 

The  Joint  for  Inclination.  This,  without 
question,  is  an  advantage  and  while  it  is  an  inex- 
pensive addition  it  will  add  considerably  to  the  comfort 
of  working  and  should  invariably  be  present,  if 
pecuniary  considerations  do  not  absolutely  prohibit  it. 

Coarse  Adjustment.  Almost  all  reliable  instru- 
ments are  provided  with  both  fine  and  coarse  adjust- 
ments. The  choice  of  the  latter  lies  between  the 
sliding  tube  and  the  rack  and  pinion.  The  former  has 
only  the  advantage  of  economy  and  is  a  decided  disad- 
vantage in  the  hands  of  students  who  almost  invariably 
injure  objectives  and  preparations  with  it.  Further 
than  this,  it  is  almost  impossible  for  the  maker  to  center 
the  nose-piece  to  the  tube,  so  that  a  change  of  objective 
usually  throws  an  object  out  of  the  field  and  requires 
that  it  be  looked  for  anew  with  each  change.  With 
the  rack  and  pinion  the  nose-piece  has  an  unvarying 
relation  to  the  tube  and  is  not  liable  to  this  difficulty 
and  offers  a  steady  and  agreeable  adjustment.  The 

184 


advantages  of  the  rack  and  pinion  seem  to  be  generally 
appreciated  in  this  country  and  there  are  few  instru- 
ments sold  and  used  without  it.  Dr.  Stokes  speaks  of 
the  sliding  tube  adjustment  as  follows : 

"  This  is  a  very  inconvenient  and  undesirable 
arrangement.  It  is  awkward,  since  the  friction  is  often 
so  great  that  the  whole  stand  will  move  out  of  position 
before  the  body  will  budge,  and  frequently,  more 
frequently  than  not,  even  when  the  foot  is  heavy 
enough  to  keep  the  instrument  firmly  on  the  table, 
both  hands  are  needed  to  manipulate  the  body.  It  is 
dangerous  too,  since  under  certain  circumstances  the 
body  has  the  obnoxious  habit  of  suddenly  slipping 
farther  than  the  microscopist  intends,  stopping  only 
when  it  crashes  against  the  slide,  where  it  usually 
grinds  and  crunches  cover  glass  and  objective  with 
apparently  fiendish  glee.  A  stand  without  a  coarse 
adjustment  by  rack  and  pinion  is  a  good  stand  to  be 
permanently  left  with  the  optician.  No  fine  micro- 
scopical work  can  be  done  with  an  instrument  whose 
body  slides  through  a  friction  collar.  That  arrange- 
ment may  be  cheap,  but  it  is  also  a  torment  and  a  peril." 

Rack  and  Pinion.  This  should  be  absolutely 
smooth  with  no  back-lash  or  lost  motion  throughout  its 
entire  length,  which  can  be  determined  by  holding  the 
main  tube  and  working  the  pinion  buttons  very  slightly 
but  quickly  back  and  forth.  It  should  be  perfectly 

185 


fitted  in  its  bearings,  so  that  there  will  not  be  the  least 
side  motion  and  this  should  be  tested  under  the  magni- 
fying power  of  an  objective.  There  should  be  no 
sensation  of  the  individual  teeth  coming  in  contact. 
It  is  safe  to  assume  that  if  the  rack  and  pinion  shows 
either  of  the  above  defects,  the  instrument  is  faulty  in 
other  directions  as  well. 

Fine  Adjustment.  Nothing  in  the  microscope 
will  cause  more  aggravation  than  a  faulty  fine  adjust- 
ment. It  should  work  with  absolute  smoothness  and 
with  no  side  play  in  the  screw.  The  body  should 
respond  promptly,  when  moving  the  milled  head 
rapidly  forward  and  backward  and  should  not  cause 
any  swaying  of  the  image  during  observation.  The 
micrometer  screw  should  be  back  of  the  pinion,  not  at 
the  front  of  the  tube  nor  under  the  stage. 

Metal.  Whether  an  instrument  shall  be  of 
japanned  iron  or  lacquered  brass  is  probably  largely 
determined  by  the  amount  of  money  to  be  expended. 
So  far  as  the  intrinsic  suitability  of  the  metals  is  con- 
cerned there  is  no  difference.  Brass,  however,  offers 
the  maker  a  better  opportunity  for  displaying  his 
mechanical  skill  and  while  it  is  no  doubt  true  that 
many  highly  finished  instruments  are  of  poor  work- 
manship in  their  working  parts,  it  is  also  a  fact  that  a 
well  made  instrument  is  always  nicely  finished. 

1 8.6 


Size  and  Weight.  The  size  of  instrument  is 
worthy  of  consideration.  If  an  instrument  is  to  remain 
stationary  in  a  practitioner's  office  or  laboratory,  it  may 
be  large  without  being  cumbersome.  If,  however,  it  is 
intended  to  be  carried  about  it  should  be  of  the  smaller 
and  more  contracted  pattern. 

WoHdng  Space  Below  Stage.  Another  im- 
portant consideration  is  the  space  between  the  stage 
and  base,  or  table.  While  it  is  advisable  to  have  the 
stage  low  on  account  of  the  convenience  in  manipulat- 
ing a  slide,  there  should  still  be  sufficient  space  for  the 
convenient  attachment  of  substage  accessories.  In  this 
respect  the  American  instruments  are  superior  as  they 
are  built  for  the  better  accommodation  of  accessories. 

Stage.  A  variety  of  stages  is  offered  on  instru- 
ments of  similar  construction.  The  plain,  flat  stage, 
while  preferred  by  some,  offers  no  advantages  over  the 
ordinary  round  one,  unless  specially  made  for  examining 
specimens  on  larger  slides  than  the  standard  3  by  i 
inch.  Those  stages  in  which  the  upper  surface  is 
covered  with  vulcanite  offer  many  advantages.  The 
spring  clips  are  usually  of  similar  construction,  although 
varying  in  detail  and  curves.  Properly  constructed 
clips  should  have  such  elasticity  as  to  allow  specimens 
to  be  brought  under  them  without  resistance  and  keep 
them  properly  in  pkce,  without  too  much  pressure  and 
consequent  friction. 


The  Mechanical  Stage,  while  an  absolute  neces- 
sity in  petrographical  and  other  work  where  a  systematic 
search,  as  for  bacilli  or  in  blood  counting,  over  the 
entire  surface  of  object  is  required,  will  also  be  found 
a  most  useful  accessory.  The  obstacle  of  considerable 
cost  which  formerly  prevailed  is  now  removed  and 
good  mechanical  stages  may  be  obtained  at  a  very 
reasonable  cost.  They  are  supplied  in  two  forms  : 

Fixed  mechanical  stage,  in  which  the  mechanical 
movement  is  an  integral  part  of  the  stage. 

Attachable  mechanical  stage,  which  can  be  attached 
to  the  Continental  stands  having  plain  stages.  This 
has  advantages,  since  it  may  be  removed,  leaving  the 
stage  plate  free,  but  it  cannot  be  revolved.  Either 
form  involves  the  most  delicate  work  and  while  the 
parts  are  necessarily  small  should  be  built  with  a  view 
to  strength  and  durability.  They  should  work  with  the 
utmost  precision  and  smoothness  and  with  absolutely  no 
lost  motion. 

Revolving  Stage.  While  this  is  also  a  great 
convenience  in  all  work,  it  is  a  necessity  in  some 
directions,  and  when  provided  with  centering  screws 
may  be  used  to  some  extent  as  a  mechanical  stage  with 
only  a  limited  movement,  however.  It  should  work 
freely  with  the  rolling  motion  of  one  finger,  without 
any  side  play  and  without  throwing  the  object  out  of 
the  plane  of  focus  during  revolution. 

1 88 


Substage.  This  is  an  absolute  necessity  in  a 
modern  microscope,  except  perhaps  for  students'  use 
in  primary  work.  It  should  have  a  vertical  adjustment 
and  preferably  with  rack  and  pinion.  If  possible  select 
the  complete  sub  stage  attachment. 

Substage  Condenser.  If  means  will  permit, 
purchase  this,  as  it  is  in  all  work  most  convenient  and 
in  some,  bacteriology,  etc.,  absolutely  necessary.  The 
Abbe  condenser  is  the  cheapest  form  giving  good 
results  and  one  with  numerical  aperture  of  1.20  is 
sufficient  in  all  cases  unless  oil  immersion  objectives  of 
the  greatest  aperture  are  used. 

Objectives  and  Eyepieces.  It  is  hoped  that 
the  information  given  of  the  various  qualities  in  an 
objective  will  aid  to  make  a  suitable  selection  of  the 
optical  parts.  Since  the  stands  have  been  classified  as 
of  long  and  short  standard  tube  lengths,  the  first  quality 
to  look  for  is,  after  the  stand  has  been  selected,  the 
suitability  of  objective  and  eyepiece  to  it  and  to  the 
work.  A  variety  of  powers  is  obtained  by  a  suitable 
combination  of  eyepieces  and  objectives  and  while 
a  considerable  increase  in  power  can  be  obtained  by 
short  focus  eyepieces  this  is  not  advantageous. 

Eyepiece.  Select  the  Huyghenian  eyepiece  and 
no  higher  power  than  3-4  inch.  In  catalogues  many 
outfits  are  made  up  of  one  eyepiece  and  two  objectives, 
but  this  is  only  for  economy  ;  it  is  always  advisable  to 

189 


select  two  eyepieces,  preferably  the  2  inch  and  i  inch 
and  insist  that  they  be  parfocal,  as  this  will  be  found 
extremely  convenient  and  will  not  disturb  the  optical 
standard  length.  If  for  any  work  1-2  inch  or  higher  ' 
powers  are  desired,  the  solid  eyepiece  may  be  recom- 
mended. With  the  apochromatic  objectives  use  the 
compensating  eyepieces  only.  Every  eyepiece  should 
be  marked  with  its  equivalent  focus. 

Objectives.  For  all  ordinary  student  and  pro- 
fessional work,  not  involving  bacteriological  investiga- 
tions, the  3-4  inch  0.22  N.  A.,  and  1-5  inch  0.62  N.  A. 
for  long  tube ;  and  2-3  inch  0.24  N.  A.,  and  t-6  inch 
0.85  N.  A.  or  1-8  inch  0.93  N.  A.,  for  short  tube  have 
generally  been  accepted  as  best  suited. 

Bacteriological  investigations  absolutely  require  an 
oil  immersion  objective  in  which  the  1-12  inch  of  1.32 
N.  A.  is  generally  employed. 

Botanical  work  necessitates  a  2  inch  or  3  inch  in 
addition  to  the  regular  outfit. 

For  urinary  work  and  blood  counting  where  a 
considerable  working  distance  is  an  absolute  necessity 
the  1-5  or  1-6  inch  of  reduced  aperture  and  long  working 
distance  are  recommended. 

Objectives  of  Wide  Aperture.  It  will  be 
noted  that  objectives  of  the  lowest  price  and  lowest  in 
the  scale  of  efficiency  have  been  recommended  as 
ample  for  ordinary  use,  but  it  is  wrell  to  bear  in  mind 
or  study  the  advantage  which  is  obtained  by  objectives 

190 


of  larger  angular  aperture.  These  advantages  are 
absolute  and  unquestionable,  but  whether  commensurate 
with  the  additional  pecuniary  outlay  must  be  left  mostly 
to  the  judgment  of  the  purchaser.  That  he  may  be 
somewhat  guided,  we  may  say  that  the  selection  of 
higher  or  highest  grade  objectives  is  not  by  any  means 
exceptipnal,  but  general,  and  would  undoubtedly  be 
more  common  but  for  the  barrier  of  expense. 

In  these  days  of  competition,  prices  alone  are  too 
often  made  the  inducement  without  any  reference  to 
quality.  Be  distrustful  of  all  such  objectives  and  if 
contemplating  their  purchase,  always  reserve  the  right 
of  having  them  examined  by  an  expert.  Have  a  dis- 
trust especially  of  all  "  nameless  "  objectives.  It  is 
safe  to  assume  that  if  the  maker  cannot  attach  his 
name  he  is  doubtful  of  their  quality. 

It  is  sometimes  found  that  dealers  offer  the  same 
objectives  of  different  quality  at  different  prices.  Too 
great  care  cannot  be  observed  in  such  cases,  as  the 
very  fact  of  the  admission  of  a  difference  in  quality 
indicates  that  they  are  made  by  an  unreliable  maker. 
This  mode  of  offering  objectives  was  in  vogue  many 
years  ago  when  the  principles  of  optics  and  the  facilities 
for  making  were  limited  and  when  a  higher  price  was 
asked  for  those  which  might  be  termed  a  happy  com- 
bination. There  is  no  excuse,  however,  at  the  present 
day,  for  anything  of  this  kind,  because  every  con- 
scientious optician  has  his  standard  for  every  objective. 

191 


In  purchasing  a  microscope  a  beginner  may  be 
easily  misled  by  the  enticing  appearance  of  an  object, 
which  may  be  due  not  so  much  to  the  instrument  as  to 
the  object  itself  and  if  the  optical  parts  are  inferior,  it 
will  require  but  a  short  experience  to  become  convinced 
of  it — usually  as  soon  as  a  comparison  can  be  made  with 
reliable  work.  The  investment  in  one  of  these  objec- 
tives is  not  only  a  source  of  disappointment,  but  usually 
proves  to  be  a  pecuniary  loss,  as  it  is  generally  followed 
by  a  fresh  outlay  in  responsible  work.  It  is  of  ordinary 
occurrence  that  such  objectives  have  been  sent  to  the 
writer's  firm  with  the  request  to  examine  them  and 
rectify  the  faults ;  but  an  examination  almost  invariably 
proves  that  the  cost  of  doing  so  is  considerably  greater 
than  that  of  a  new  objective  of  the  same  power  and  it 
would  not  even  then  be  equal  to  the  latter. 

Accessories.  We  have  already  stated  in  the 
body  of  this  book  which  kinds  of  accessories  are  con- 
sidered useful.  Some  of  them  are  absolutely  necessary 
in  some  special  lines  of  work,  in  which  case,  however, 
the  student  is  generally  conversant  with  the  require- 
ments and  may  make  a  suitable  selection,  but  for  all 
general  purposes  some  accessories  are  necessities  where 
others  are  only  conveniences  and  we  append  a  list  of 
such  which,  unless  prohibited  by  necessity,  should 
accompany  each  outfit. 

Abbe  substage  condenser,  preferably  the  complete 
substage  attachment  giving  all  adjustments. 

192 


Double,  triple  or  quadruple  nose-piece  according  to 
the  number  of  objectives  accompanying  the  microscope. 

Abbe  camera  lucida. 

Revolving  or  attachable  mechanical  stage. 

Eyepiece  micrometer  and  stage  micrometer. 

Mounted  objects,  Proboscis  of  Blow-fly  and  P. 
angulqtum,  dry. 

Pocket  magnifier,  preferably  Aplanatic  or  Hastings 
triplet. 

Cover  glass  gauge. 
Flat-wick  oil  lamp. 
Dissecting  stand  or  dissecting  microscope. 

Besides  these  there  are  other  requirements  such  as 
slides,  covers,  mounting  media,  forceps,  etc.,  the  neces- 
sity of  which,  however,  will  be  suggested  by  teachers 
or  can  be  determined  from  books  devoted  to  this 
purpose.  There  are  other  articles  which  in  some 
directions  are  necessities,  but  are  general  conveniences, 
among  which  may  be  mentioned  : 

Adjustable  drawing  table. 

Polariscope. 

Bull's  Eye  Condenser. 

Photomicrographic  camera. 

Live  box  or  compressor. 

Turn  table. 

Revolving  microscopical  table. 

Cabinet  for  objects. 


CARE  OF  A  MICROSCOPE. 


Besides  acquiring  the  ability  to  properly  use  an 
instrument  with  its  accessories,  it  is  important  to  know 
how  to  keep  it  in  the  best  working  condition.  It  may 
be  said  without  reserve  that  an  instrument  properly 
made  at  the  outset  and  judiciously  used  should  hardly 
show  any  signs  of  wear  either  in  appearance  or  in  its 
working  parts,  even  after  the  most  protracted  use  ;  and 
further  than  this,  every  good  instrument  should  have  a 
provision  for  taking  up  lost  motion,  if  there  is  a  likeli- 
hood that  this  may  occur  in  any  of  the  parts. 

Especial  care  should  be  given  to  the  optical  parts, 
in  fact  such  care  that  they  will  remain  in  as  good  con- 
dition as  when  first  received,  after  any  amount  of  use. 
Accidental  injury  may  occur,  but  is  quite  unlikely  if  a 
systematic  manner  of  working  is  followed,  if  a  special 
receptacle  for  each  part  is  provided. 

Do  not  allow  any  person  except  your  teacher  to 
manipulate  your  microscope  or  accessories.  One 
person  may  be  expert  in  the  manipulation  of  one 
instrument  and  still  find  it  difficult  to  work  with 
another.  The  fine  adjustment  particularly  causes  the 

194 


greatest  difficulty,  as  in  some  instruments  the  move- 
ment of  the  fine  adjustment  is  in  a  direction  opposite 
to  that  of  the  micrometer  screw,  and  thus  the  objective 
as  well  as  the  object  is  endangered. 

If  the  microscope  is  to  be  carried  any  distance  it 
should  be  done  in  its  case. 

Avoid  exposure  of  the  microscope  to  direct  sunlight 
and  extreme  or  sudden  changes  in  temperature.  If  by 
chance  the  microscope  should  have  become  very  cold, 
as  during  transportation  in  winter,  allow  it  to  warm 
gradually. 

Care  of  the  Stand.  Keep  free  from  dust  is  one 
of  the  first  rules  to  be  observed.  When  not  in  use  place 
the  microscope  in  its  case  or  cover  with  a  bell  jar  or 
close  mesh  cloth  such  as  cotton  flannel  or  velvet  which 
should  reach  to  the  table.  If  the  case  will  not  receive 
the  entire  outfit,  remove  the  double  or  triple  nose-piece, 
if  these  form  part  of  it,  and  place  objectives  in  their 
cases.  If  dust  settles  on  any  part  of  the  instrument 
remove  it  first  with  a  camel's  hair  brush  and  then  wipe 
carefully  with  a  chamois  skin,  wiping  with  the  grain  of 
the  finish  of  the  metal  and  not  across  it,  as  in  the  latter 
case  it  is  likely  to  cause  scratches. 

When  handling  the  stand,  grasp  it  by  the  pillar  or 
stage.  While  the  arm  is  the  most  convenient  part  it  is 
at  the  same  time  the  most  dangerous  to  the  fine 
adjustment. 


Avoid  sudden  jars,  such  as  placing  upon  the  table 
or  into  the  case  with  force. 

Remove  any  Canada  balsam  or  cedar  oil  which  may 
adhere  to  any  part  of  the  stand  with  a  cloth  moistened 
with  benzole  and  wipe  dry  with  chamois. 

Use  no  alcohol  on  any  part  of  the  instrument  as  it 
will  remove  the  lacquer..  As  the  latter  is  for  the 
purpose  of  preventing  oxydization  of  the  metals,  it  is 
important  to  observe  this  rule. 

To  use  the  draw-tube  impart  the  spiral  motion. 

To  lubricate  any  of  the  parts,  use  a  slight  quantity 
of  soft  tallow  or  good  clock  oil,  or  paraffine  oil. 

If  the  pinion  works  loose  from  the  jar  incident  to 
transportation  or  long  use,  which  sometimes  occurs  to 
such  an  extent  that  the  body  will  not  remain  in  position, 
increase  its  tension  by  tightening  the  screws  on  pinion 
cover. 

Occasionally  withdraw  the  tube  from  the  arm,  wipe 
clean  and  lubricate  both  slides.  This  is  highly  important 
as  the  slides  being  constantly  exposed  become  dusty 
and  the  lubricant  is  inclined  to  gum. 

Apply  a  small  quantity  of  soft  tallow  or  good  clock 
or  paraffine  oil  to  a  cloth,  wipe  well  over  the  surfaces 
and  remove  the  superfluous  amount  with  a  dry  cloth  or 
Japanese  paper.  If  the  lubricant  becomes  gummy, 
remove  by  wiping  with  a  small  quantity  of  benzine  or 
benzole  applied  to  cambric. 

196 


Do  not  apply  oil  or  grease  to  the  rack  or  pinion 
as  this  will  act  as  a  dirt  catcher  and  wear  out  the  teeth 
at  the  points  of  contact. 

/;/  inclining  the  stand  always  grasp  it  by  the  arm 
and  never  by  the  tube,  as  in  the  latter  case  it  may 
loosen  the  slide  or  tear  off  some  of  the  parts. 

In  using  a  screw  driver  grind  its  two  large  surfaces 
so  that  they  are  parallel  and  not  wedge-shaped,  so  it 
will  exactly  fit  in  the  slot  of  the  screw-head.  Turn  the 
screw  with  a  slow  steady  motion  pressing  the  screw- 
driver firmly  into  the  slot.  No  screw-head  will  ever 
be  injured  if  these  points  are  observed. 

When  repairs  or  alterations  are  necessary,  always 
have  these  made  by  the  manufacturers  who  can,  from 
a  system  of  duplicated  parts,  do  it  not  only  cheapest, 
but  best. 

Joint  for  Inclination.  If  the  joint  should 
become  loose  so  as  to  prevent  the  arm  being  set  at 
any  angle  of  inclination,  it  should  be  tightened  by 
drawing  up  the  nut  at  one  or  the  other  side.  If  the 
nut  has  screw  slot  use  a  properly  prepared  screw 
driver,  but  if  two  holes  a  suitable  key  should  be 
obtained  from  the  maker.  In  high  grade  instruments 
the  axle  is  generally  tapering,  and  to  determine  which 
nut  is  to  be  drawn  up  can  only  be  done  by  trial. 


'97 


Care  of  the  Coarse  Adjustment.  Special 
care  should  be  given  to  keep  the  coarse  adjustment 
free  from  dust  as  its  effect  is  particularly  pernicious. 
The  slides  and  rack  and  pinion  are  necessarily  exposed 
and  the  lubricant  is  apt  to  catch  dust  and  also  to  gum. 
The  tube  should  be  occasionally  withdrawn  from  the 
arm  and  the  slides  carefully  wiped  with  a  cloth 
moistened  with  benzole.  Lubricate  by  applying  a 
small  quantity  of  soft  tallow  or  paraffine  oil  to  a  cloth 
and  wiping  well  over  the  surfaces,  removing  the  super- 
fluous amount  with  a  dry  cloth.  The  teeth  of  neither 
rack  nor  pinion  should  ever  be  lubricated.  An 
occasional  cleaning  of  the  teeth  with  an  old  tooth 
brush  is  advisable. 

It  is  advisable  occasionally  to  lubricate  the  pinion 
shank  on  both,  sides  of  the  arm  with  a  very  minute 
quantity  of  paraffine  oil. 

If  the  pinion  works  loose  from  jar  incident  to  trans- 
portation or  long  use,  which  sometimes  occurs  to  such 
an  extent  that  the  body  will  not  remain  in  position, 
increase  the  friction  upon  it  by  tightening  the  screws 
on  the  pinion  cover. 

Fine  Adjustment.  In  a  general  way  it  may  be 
said  that  if  the  fine  adjustment  ceases  to  work  satis- 
factorily the  instrument  had  better  be  returned  to  the 
maker,  as  it  involves  the  most  delicate  working  and 
few  people  are  conversant  with  its  construction.  There 

198 


is  very  seldom  any  occasion  for  this,  however,  if  used 
with  reasonable  care. 

If  the  fine  adjustment  does  not  respond  to  the 
turning  of  the  micrometer  screw,  or  if  it  comes  to  a 
stop,  it  indicates  that  the  adjustment  screw  has  come 
to  the  limit  of  its  motion  at  either  end.  It  should  by 
no  means  be  forced ;  it  should  at  all  times  be  kept  at 
a  medium  point. 

The  micrometer  screw  should  never  be  removed 
unless  after  long  use  it  works  with  a  pronounced  gritty 
feeling.  In  this  case  unscrew  from  its  bearing,  wipe 
clean  with  a  cloth  moistened  with  benzole,  and  after 
wiping  dry  apply  good  tallow,  being  careful  to  start  the 
threads  properly.  If  they  are  not  properly  started 
much  mischief  may  be  done.  In  some  instruments  the 
threads  are  left  handed.  In  removing  the  screw 
observe  whether  there  is  a  small  steel  pin  in  a  recess 
in  it,  and  if  so  be  careful  that  this  is  in  proper  position 
when  returned  or  else  the  fine  adjustment  will  be 
inoperative. 

Screw- Driver.  Ordinary  screw-drivers  are  not  fit 
for  use  on  the  microscope.  A  properly  made  screw- 
driver should  be  ground  on  its  two  large  surfaces  so 
that  they  are  parallel  and  not  wedge  shaped,  so  that  it 
will  exactly  fit  in  the  slot  of  the  screw  head.  In  using, 
turn  the  screw  with  a  slow,  steady  motion,  pressing  the 
screw-driver  slowly  into  the  slot.  No  screw  head  will 
ever  be  injured  or  marred  if  these  points  are  observed. 

199 


Care  of  Objectives  and  Eyepieces.  Every 
outfit  should  be  provided  with  a  camel's  hair  brush 
and  a  well  washed  piece  of  linen.  On  account  of  its 
fine  texture  chamois  skin  is  desirable,  but  only  after  it 
has  been  repeatedly  washed.  No  dust  should  be  per- 
mitted to  settle  upon  nor  should  the  fingers  come  in 
contact  with  any  of  the  surfaces.  Occasional  cleaning 
is  desirable  even  when  they  (o  and  e  p )  are  not  used, 
as  a  film  settles  upon  the  outer  as  well  as  the  inner 
surfaces  of  the  eyepiece  and  the  rear  surface  of  the 
objective,  and  creates  a  cloudiness  in  the  image. 

When  not  in  use  objectives  and  eyepieces  should 
be  kept  in  their  receptacles.  If  objectives  are  left 
attached  to  the  microscope  either  singly  or  on  revolv- 
ing nose-pieces,  leave  the  eyepiece  in  the  tube  so  that 
no  dust  can  enter  and  settle  upon  the  rear  lens  of 
the  objective. 

Objectives  especially  should  be  kept  where  they 
are  not  subject  to  extreme  and  sudden  changes  of 
temperature  as  the  expansion  and  contraction  may 
cause  the  cement  between  the  lenses  to  crack.  Also 
avoid  direct  sunlight,  as  the  cement  may  soften 
sufficiently  to  ooze  out. 

Eyepiece.  Visible  defects  in  the  field  are  always 
traceable  to  impurities  in  the  eyepiece,  not  in  the 
objective,  and  are  easily  recognized  by  revolving  it. 
Indistinctness  in  the  image  or  loss  of  light  may  be  due 


to  soiled  or  coated  surfaces  in  either  eyepiece  or 
objective. 

Dust  if  on  either  the  eye-lens  or  field-lens  is  apparent 
as  dark,  indistinct  spots. 

To  dean  the  surfaces,  breath  upon  them  and, 
giving  a  revolving  motion  to  the  eyepiece,  wipe  with 
well  washed  linen  and  finally  blow  upon  the  surface,  or 
use  camel's  hair  brush  to  remove  particles  of  lint. 

At  regular  periods  unscrew  the  eye-lens  and  field- 
lens  and  clean  the  inner  surfaces. 

Objective.  This  should  be  used  with  the  utmost 
care.  The  systems  should  never  be  separated,  even  if 
they  can  be  unscrewed,  as  they  are  liable  to  become 
decentered  and  dust  may  enter. 

Avoid  all  violent  contact  of  the  front  lens  with  the 
cover  glass.  The  oil  immersion  objectives  are  partic- 
ularly sensitive  and  easily  ruined. 

Screw  into  the  nose-piece  and  unscrew  by  grasping 
the,  knurled  edge  and  keeping  in  line  with  the  tube. 

Occasionally  examine  the  rear  surface  of  the  objec- 
tive with  magnifier  and  if  dust  be  present  remove  with 
camel's  hair  brush. 

Clean  an  immersion  objective  immediately  after  it 
has  been  used  by  removing  the  fluid  with  moist  cloth 
and  wiping  clean  with  dry  cloth  or  lens  paper. 

While  cleaning  give  the  objective  a  revolving  motion. 

201 


If  the  immersion  oil  should  have  become  thick,  or 
any  substance  adheres  to  the  surface,  which  cannot  be 
removed  by  wiping,  apply  a  small  amount  of  benzine 
to  a  cloth  and  wipe  carefully  but  quickly,  so  that  the 
fluid  will  not  affect  the  setting  of  the  lens.  Wipe  clean 
with  dry  cloth. 

Do  not  apply  alcohol  to  objectives  under  any  con- 
dition. 


If  any  part  of  the  microscope  cannot  be  brought  to 
a  satisfactory  working  condition  by  the  foregoing 
instructions,  or  any  part  is  injured  by  accident  it  should 
invariably  be  sent  to  the  maker  or  to  a  well  known 
manufacturer  of  microscopes. 


INDEX. 

Abbe  Camera  Lucida,  168—173,  193 

Optical  Construction  of,  168 

Abbe  Condenser,  154 

Abbe  Test  Plate,  142 

Aberration,  Chromatic,  10,  85 

Correction  of,  12 

Spherical,  9,  12,  88,  138 

Accessories  to  Microscope,  192 

Achromatic  Combination  or  Lens,  13 

Adjustable  Objectives,  64,  93,  143 

Adjustments,  Coarse  and  Fine,  32,  45,  48 

Care  of,  198 

Closed  and  Open,  93,  143 

Amplification,  100 

Angle,  70,  72 

Angular  Aperture,  70,  80,  101 

How  to  Measure,  80 

Anterior  System  of  Objective,  66 

Apertometer,  82 

Aperture,  72,  162 

Numerical,  77 

Of  Condenser,  162 

Aplanatic  Lens,  13 

Aplanatic  Triplet,  16,  23 

Hastings',  16,  23 

Apochromatic  Objectives,  102 

Apparent  Aperture,  163 

Areas  Magnification,  24 

Arm  of  Microscope,  29 

Astigmatism,  131 

Attachable  Mechanical  Stage,  41,  188 

Axis,  Optical,  34 

Principal,  5 


Barnes  Dissecting  Microscope,  20 

Base  of  Microscope,  29,  51,  184 

Binocular  Eyepiece,  110 

Binocular  Microscope,  44 

Blood  Counting,  40,  190 

Bodies  or  Tubes,  44 

Body  of  Microscope,  29 

Bruecke  Lens,  17 

Bull's  Eye  Condenser,  153,  193 

Burning  Point,  7 

Cabinet  for  Objects,  193 

Camera  Lucida,  167 — 177 

Camera  Lucida,  Abbe,  168—173 

Drawing  Table  for,  175 

Field  and  Magnification  with,  172 

How  to  Use,  172,  173 

Illumination  with,  170 

Measuring  Magnification  with,  176 

Measuring  Size  of  Object  with,  177 

Optical  Construction  of,  169 

Simple  Form,  167,  172 

Cap  Diaphragms,  54,  131 

Care  of  Microscope,  194 

Cedar  Oil,  61,  75,  146 

Centering  Screws,  33,  39 

Centering  the  Condenser,  159 

Centering  the  Illumination,  160 

Chromatic  Aberration,  10,  85 

Correction  of,  86 

To  Judge,  86 

Classification  of  Microscopes, 

Clips, 

Closed  Adjustment,  93,  143 

Coarse  Adjustment,  32,  45,  184 

Care  of,  198 

Coddington  Lens,  15 


Collar,  31 

Collar  Correction,  143 

Collective  or  Field  Lens,  58,  107 

Compensating  Eyepiece,  103,  111 

Complete  Substage,  156—158 

Compound  Microscope,  1,  27 

Concave  Lenses,  4,  6 

Concavp  Mirror,  121,  152 

Focal  Point  of,  122 

Use  with  Condenser,  159 

Condenser,  122,  154—166 

Aperture  of,  162 

Bull's  Eye,  153 

Centering  of,  159 

Focusing  of,  161 

Illumination  with,  164 

Oblique  Light  with,  164 

Purpose  of,  154 

Substage,  156 

Use  with  Immersion  Objectives,  162 

Continental  Type  Eyepiece,  107 

Continental  Type  Microscope,  35 

Convex  Lenses,  4,  5 

Focal  Length  of,  5,  6 

Correct  Position  at  the  Microscope,  115 

Corrected  Lens,  13 

Cover  Glass,  34,  74 

Abbe  Test  Plate  for  Measuring,  142 

Correction  for,  88 

Influence  upon  Objective,  140 

Influence  upon  Angular  Aperture,  74 

Influence  upon  Spherical  Aberration,  88 

Sizes  of,  141 

Standard,  91 

Thickness  to  Use,  93 

Cover  Glass  Gauge,  93,  193 


Crown  Glass  in  Achromatic  Combination,  13 

Defects  in  Eyepieces  and  Objectives,  112 

Diameters  Magnification,  24 

Diaphragm,  10,  33,  129 

Cap,  54 

Eyepiece,  107 

Iris,  54,  157,  158 

Revolving,  53 

Substage,  53,  129,  157,  158 

Use  of,  129,  163 

Diatoms  as  Test  Objects,  133 

Dispersion  of  Light  by  Prism,  11 

Dissecting  Microscopes,  18 — 21,  193 

How  to  Use,  21 

Double  Nose-piece,  43,  118 

To  Focus  with,  127 

Double  System  of  Lenses,  66 

Doublet  Magnifier,  15 

Draw-Tube,  31,  49 

To  Operate,  50,  114 

Drawing  Objects  with  Camera  Lucida,  167 

Drawing  Table,  174,  175 

Dry  Adjustable  Objectives,  143 

Dry  Objectives,  60,  75 

English  Type  Eyepiece,  107 

Erecting  Eyepiece,  110 

Equivalent  Focus,  62 

Excelsior  Dissecting  "Microscope,  20 

Eye,  Which  to  Use,  21,  131 

Eye-lens,  58,  107 

Eyepiece  or  Ocular,  31,  55,  107—110,  189 

Binocular,  110 

Care  of,  200 

Compensating,  103,  111 

Continental  Type,  107 


Eyepiece  or  Ocular,  Defects  in,  112 

English  Type,  107 

Erecting,  110 

How  to  Attach,  116 

Huyghenian,  107 

Index,  111 

Kellner,  109 

Micrometer,  109,  110,  178,  181 

'  Negative,  107 

Orthoscopic,  109 

Parfocal,  106 

Periscopic,  109 

Projection,  109,  112 

Rams  den,  109 

Rating  of,  104 

Searcher,  111 

Selection  of,  189 

Solid,  108 

Eyepiece  Micrometer,  179,  193 

Eyepoint,  132,  105,  106 

Field  of  View,  16,  17,  95,  101,  104 

Field,  Flatness  of,  95 

Field-lens,  58,  107 

Filar  Micrometer,  180 

Finding  the  Object,  118 

Fine  Adjustment,  32,  48,  186 

Care  of,  198 

Focusing  with,  128 

Fixed  Mechanical  Stage,  41,  188 

Flatness  of  Field,  95 

Flint  Glass  in  Achromatic  Combination,  13 

Focal  Length,  5 

To  Determine,  6 

Focal  Point,  5 

Of  Mirror,  53,  122 

Focus,  Equivalent,  62 


Focus,  Principal,  5 

Virtual  and  Real,  6 

Focusing  the  Condenser,  161 

Focusing  the  Objective,  124 

Focusing  with  Fine  Adjustment,  128 

Glass,  Crown  and  Flint,  13 

Jena,  57 

Glass  Stage,  39 

Graduated  Head,  48 

Graduated  Stage,  38 

Hastings'  Aplanatic  Triplet,  16 

Head,  Micrometer  Screw,  48 

High  Power  Objectives,  .                              63,  99 

How  to  Focus,  125 

Test  Objects  for,  133 

Holders,  Stands  and  Dissecting  Microscopes,          18 

Homogeneous  Immersion  Fluid,  61 

Homogeneous  Immersion  Objectives,  60,  75,  146 

Huyghenian  Eyepieces,  107 

Illuminating  the  Object,  23,  120,  124,  159,  164 

Illuminating  Objectives,  64 

Illuminating  Opaque  Objects,  152 

Illumination  with  Substage  Condenser,  154 

Image,  Magnified,  27 

Real  and  Virtual,  8,  59,  105,  106 

Immersion  Fluid,  61 

Immersion  Objectives,  60.  75,  146 

Applying  Oil  to,  146 

Test  Plate  with,  147 

Index,  48 

Index  Eyepiece,  111 

Iris  Diaphragm,  54,  129,  157,  158 

Jena  Glass,  57 

Joint  for  Inclination,  52,  184,  197 

Kellner  Eyepiece,  10 


Lens  Holders  or  Stands,  18 

Lens  Systems,  66 

Lenses,  How  Made,  67 

Magnifying,  14 — 24 

Optical  Properties  of,  1 

Simple,  4 

Stopped  down,  10 

Linear  Magnification,  24 

Linen  Tester,  19 

Lister's  Method  for  Measuring  Angular  Aperture,    81 

Low  Power  Objectives,  62,  99 

How  to  Focus,  125 

Text  Objects  for  132 

Lower  Iris  Diaphragm,  .              158 

Magnifier,  Tripod,  18 

Magnifiers,  14-24,  193 

Caution  in  Purchasing,  16,  24 

How  to  Use,  21 

Magnification  with  Camera  Lucida,  172,  173 

Magnifying  Power.  7,  21,  24,  60,  84,  99 

To  Determine,  25,  176 

Measuring  the  Size  of  an  Object,  177 

Mechanical  Stage,  40,  120,  188,  193 

Medium  Power  Objectives,  62,  99,  136 

Test  Objects  for,  133 

Meniscus  Lenses,  4 

Metal  for  Microscope,  186 

Micrometer,  Eyepiece,  178 

Filar,  180 

,  Stage,  177 

Micrometer  Eyepiece,  109,  110,  178,  181 

Micrometer  Screw  Adjustment,  32,  48,  199 

Microscope,  Binocular,  44 

Care  of,  194 

Caution  in  Purchasing,  24 

Classification  of,  34 


Microscope,  Compound,  1,  27,  59 

Continental  Type,  35,  183 

Correct  Position  at,  115 

Dissecting,  18 — 21 

How  to  Set  up, 

How  to  Work  with,  114 

Jackson  Model,  34 

Material  of,  28,  186 

Monocular, 

Parts  of,  29 

Purpose  of, 

Ross  Model, 

Selection  of,  182 

Simple,  1,  14 

Size  and  Weight  of, 

Microscopical  Table,  Revolving,  193 

Middle  System  of  Objective,  66 

Milled  Heads,  32 

Mirror,  33,  52,  120,  157 

Focal  Point  of, 

Use  with  Condenser,  159 

Mirror  Bar,  33,  52 

Negative  Eyepiece, 
Nose-piece,  31,  42,  193 

Revolving, 
Numerical  Aperture, 

How  to  Compute, 

How  to  Measure, 

Of  Condenser,  155 

Object,  34,  132 

Finding  under  the  Microscope, 

How  to  Draw, 

Measuring  Size  of, 

Opaque, 

To  Illuminate,  120 

Test,  132,  192 


Object,  What  to  use  as,  132 

Objective,  .  31,  55,  60,  99,  189,  190 

Adjustable,   '  64,  143 

Angular  Aperture  of,  70 

Apochromatic,  102 

Care  of,  69,  200,  201 

Caution  in  Choosing,  190 

Color  Correction  in,  86 

Construction  of,  67 

Defects  in,  112 

How  to  Focus,  124 

How  to  Attach,  117 

Immersion,  60,  75,  146 

Illuminating,  64 

Influence  of  Cover  Glass  on,  93 

Photographic  Microscope,  64 

Powers  of,  62,  99 

Projection,  65 

Quality  of,  70 

Rating  of,  62 

Searcher,  126 

Special,  64 

Systems  of,  65 

Variable,  64,  143 

Wide  Aperture,  190 

Oblique  Light  with  Condenser,  164 

Ocular,  31,  55,  104,  200 

Oil  Immersion  Objectives,  60,  75,  99,  146 

Opaque  Objects,  151 

Open  Adjustment,  143,  145 

Opening  or  Aperture,                                 .  73 

Optical  Axis,  34 

Optical  Glass,  57,  67 

Optical  Properties  of  Lenses,  1 

Orthoscopic  Eyepiece,  109 

Over-Correction  of  Objectives,  86 


Over-Correction  of  Objectives,  To  Judge,  87 

Parfocal  Eyepieces,  106 

Penetration  94 

Periscopic  Eyepiece,  109 

Photographic  Microscope  Objectives  64 

Pillar,  29 

Pinion,  32,  198 

Plane  Mirror,  52,  121 

Use  with  Condenser,  159 

Plankton  Work,  40 
PleurosigmaAngulatum,  100,133,134,136,139,144,148,193 
Pocket  Magnifiers,  14—24,  193 

Positive  Eyepiece,  107 

Posterior  System  of  Objective,  66 
Powers  of  Objectives,  62,  99,  101 

Primary  Colors,  11 

Principal  Axis,  5 

Principal  Focus,  5 

Prism,  Dispersion  of  Light  by,  11 

Refraction  of  Light  by,  2 

Projection  Eyepiece,  109,  112 

Projection  Objectives,  65 

Quadruple  Nose-piece,  43,  118 

Quadruple  System  of  Lenses,  66 

Rack  and  Pinion,  Substage,  157,  158 
Rack  and  Pinion  Coarse  Adjustment,  32,  46.  183 

Rack  and  Pinion  Mechanical  Stage,  41 

Radius  of  Curvature,  5 

Ramsden  Eyepiece,  109 

Rating  of  Eyepieces,  104 

Rating  of  Objectives,  62 

Reading  Glass,                                                   ,  17 

Real  Focus,  6 
Real  Image,  8,  58,  105,  106 

Refraction,  2 


Resolving  Power,  82,  101 

Test  Objects  for  Determining,  132 

Revolving  Diaphragm,  53,  131 

Revolving  Nose-piece,  43 

'  To  Focus  with,  127 

Revolving  Stage,  38,  188 

Screw  Driver,  199 

Screw  Micrometer,  180 

Searcher  Eyepiece,  111 

Searcher  Objective,  126 

Secondary  Spectrum,  85,  102 

Simple  and  Compound  Microscopes,  1,  14,  27 

Simple  Lenses,  4 

Magnifying  Power  of,  25 

Single  System  of  Lenses,  66 

Size  and  Weight  of  Microscope,  187 

Slide  or  Slip,  34 

Slide  Carrier,  39 

Sliding  Tube  Adjustment,  45,  184 

To  operate,  128 

Slow  Motion,  48 

Society  Screw,  31 

Solid  Eyepiece,  108 

Special  Objectives,  64 

Spectrum,  11,  85,  102 

Spherical  Aberration,  9,  88,  96 

Influence  of  Cover  Glass  on,  88 

To  Judge,  138 

Spring  Clips,  33,  187 

Stage,  18,  32,  187 

Construction  of,  37 

Glass,  39 

Mechanical,  40,  120,  188 

Revolving,  38,  188 

Working  Space  Below,  187 

Stage  Micrometer,  176,  177,  179,  193 


Stand,  18,  28 

Care  of,  195 

Selection  of,  183 

Striae,  112 

Substage,  33,  156 

Complete,  157 

Substage  Condenser,  Illumination  with,  154 

Substage  Diaphragm,  53 

Use  of,  129 

Systems  of  Objectives,  65,  99 

Table,  Drawing,  175,  193 

Test  Objects,  132 

Test  Plate,  133,  147 

Judging  Spherical  Aberration  with,  142 

Use  with  Immersion  Objectives,  147 

Triple  Nose-piece,  43,  118 

Triple  System  of  Lenses,  66 

Triplet  Magnifiers,  16 

Tripod  Magnifier,  18 
Tube  Length,                                                  35,  36,  61,  183 

Tubes  or  Bodies,  44 

Turn  Table,  193 

Under-Correction  of  Objectives,  86 

To  Judge, 

Universal  or  Society  Screw,  31 

Upper  Iris  Diaphragm,  157 

Variable  Objectives,  64 

Virtual  Focus,  6 
Virtual  Image,                                                8,  58,  105,  106 

Water  Immersion  Objectives, 

Working  Distance,  17,  96 

To  Measure, 
Working  Space  below  Stage, 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


QCT101960 


QCT  3  1   19D0 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


4/ 

/f 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY